JP7700890B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine that has a ball entry area configured to allow a gaming ball to enter, and a guide surface that guides the gaming ball toward the ball entry area (Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-164598 A

However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of guiding the gaming ball .

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can improve the guidance of gaming balls.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises an entry area configured to allow a gaming ball to enter, and a guide means having a guide surface for guiding a gaming ball toward the entry area and configured to change its position in a front view, and configured to allow a gaming ball guided by the guide surface to enter the entry area and flow down to the predetermined area when the guide means is located at a predetermined position, the guide means at least comprises a front side erection means configured to stand against the guide surface from a position connected to the front side end of the guide surface, and a rear side erection means configured to stand against the guide surface from a position connected to the rear side end of the guide surface, and the gaming ball guided by the guide surface is configured to flow down between the front side end and the rear side end of the guide surface, and the guide surface is configured to be movable between the front side erection means or the rear side erection means. The means reduces the width in the front-to-back direction at least in part, and is configured to allow a game ball guided by the guiding surface to abut against either the front side standing means or the rear side standing means, and the front side standing means and the rear side standing means are configured to be capable of aligning a plurality of game balls guided by the guiding surface in a flow-down area in front of the entry area so that a plurality of game balls enter the entry area one by one, and the gaming machine is equipped with a configuration means configured to allow at least a portion of the guiding means to which the front side standing means or the rear side standing means are configured to abut when at least the guiding means is located at the predetermined position, and is configured to be capable of regulating the flow-down of game balls from the entry area to the predetermined area when at least the guiding means is displaced from the predetermined position .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the guidance of the gaming ball can be improved .

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 1A is a front view of the winning port unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the winning port unit. An exploded oblique front view of the prize slot unit. An exploded oblique rear view of the prize slot unit. 2 is an exploded oblique view of the base member and the first electric accessory. FIG. FIG. 13A and 13B are side views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. 4A and 4B are front views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500 taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. 10A. (a) and (b) are front views of the winning port unit. 13A and 13B are side views of the first electric feature and the drive unit. FIG. 20(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit taken along line XXa-XXa in FIG. 18(a), and FIG. 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit taken along line XXb-XXb in FIG. 18(b). 13A and 13B are side views of the first electric feature and the drive unit. 21(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIa of FIG. 21(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit in a range XXIIb of FIG. 21(b). 1A is a front perspective view of the left wing member, and FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the right wing member. 24(a) is a front view of the winning port unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 24(a). 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 27(a) is a top view of the winning port unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in FIG. 27(a). 27(a) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the prize slot unit in range XXVIII of FIG. 27(b). FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged view of the game board in range XXIX of FIG. 2 . 30(a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30(a). 1 is an exploded oblique front view of a decorative pattern display device. 1 is an exploded perspective rear view of a decorative pattern display device. 1A is a front view of the inner reel unfolded, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the outer reel unfolded. A cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV in Figure 30(a). A partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device in range XXXV of Figure 34. 36A is a partial enlarged view of the rotating member, and FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in FIG. 36A. FIG. 2 is a front view of the segment display device. FIG. 2 is an exploded view of the segment display device. 4A is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. 1A is a front view of the second segment unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the second segment unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit. A cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLV-XLV in Figure 42 (a). FIG. A cross-sectional view of the second segment unit taken along line XLVII-XLVII in Figure 42 (a). FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective front view of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit. 4A is a front view of a displacement member, and FIG. 4B is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. 53 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member taken along line LIII-LIII in FIG. 51(a). FIG. A front view of the segment display device and the decorative pattern display device. 1 is a schematic diagram of a segment display device and a decorative pattern display device. 4A to 4C are front views of the vertical displacement unit. 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(a). FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 64(a) is a partial enlarged view of a rotating member in the second embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 64(a). A cross-sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a third embodiment. 66(a) is a partial enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). A cross-sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in the fourth embodiment. 68(a) is a partial enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). A cross-sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a fifth embodiment. 70(a) is a partial enlarged view of the circular member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the circular member taken along line LXXb-LXXb in FIG. 70(a). A cross-sectional view of a decorative pattern display device in a sixth embodiment. 72(a) is a partial enlarged view of the rotating member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in FIG. 72(a). 73(a) is a partial enlarged view of the outer reel unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in FIG. 73(a). 13A is a front view of a rotating member according to a seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a side view of the rotating member. 1A to 1C are side views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. 1A to 1C are front views of the drive unit and the first electric accessory. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit according to an eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are side views of the first electric feature and the drive unit. 13A and 13B are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective front view of a drive unit according to a ninth embodiment. 13A and 13B are side views of the first electric feature and the drive unit. 13A and 13B are front views of the first electric accessory and the drive unit. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 13A is a front view of a displacement member in a tenth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a side view of the displacement member. FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a vertical displacement unit. 91A and 91B are partial enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit in range XCI of FIG. 90. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a vertical displacement unit. 95(a) is a top view of the winning port unit in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 96(a) is a top view of the winning port unit in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb in FIG. 96(a). 23A is a perspective front view of the left wing member in the fourteenth embodiment, and FIG. 23B is a perspective front view of the right wing member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the prize opening unit, (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in Figure 98(a), and (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in Figure 98(b). 99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line XCIXb-XCIXb in FIG. 99. 100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along line Cb-Cb in FIG. 100(a). (a) is a front view of the first electric prop and drive unit in the 16th embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric prop and drive unit 8530 taken along line CIb-CIb in Figure 101 (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric prop and drive unit taken along line CIc-CIc in Figure 101 (b). 23A and 23B are side views of the first electric accessory and drive unit in the seventeenth embodiment. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 13A and 13B are cross-sectional views of the prize opening unit. 105(a) is a partial enlarged view of a rotating member in the eighteenth embodiment, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member taken along line CVb-CVb in FIG. 105(a). 18(a) and 18(b) are cross-sectional views of a decorative pattern display device in an 18th embodiment.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 63, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 2, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 4, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 2 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 2. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 2 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 4, and the inner frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 4 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 4, there is a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 4 and the front door 5 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front door 5 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 5c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets 8 is disposed on the rear side of the front door 5, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front door 5, the upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the type of presentation displayed on the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of a super reach presentation.

The front door 5 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around it (for example, in the corners). The light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window 5c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front door 5 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 5c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b that stops the launch of balls while it is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 76, 77, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140, a variable winning device 65, a first through gate 66, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by gluing together thin boards, and is formed so that the players cannot see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The center portion of the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see Figure 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 77 is set up inside the outer rail 77. The inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77 surround the front periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area on the front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize openings and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned on the front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 76, 77 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 76, 77 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when either the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 140 wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R variable jackpot, a 4R variable jackpot, and a 15R regular jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a symbol according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "15R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of variations (e.g., 100 variations).

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), in other words, a state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability change) includes a game state in which the probability of a hit with the second symbol described below increases and the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than when in a probability change. The time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit with the second symbol increases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the first electric device 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the first electric device 520 is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the first electric device 520 is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric device 520 associated with the second winning port 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the first electric device 520 opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the first electric device 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the number of times the first electric device 520 opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the first electric device 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is opened and the number of times the first electric device 520 opens with one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

The play area is provided with a number of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. A variable display unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a segment display device 600 and a decorative pattern display device 800 that display a third pattern in synchronization with the variable display in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by a winning (initial winning) in either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a second pattern in a variable manner, triggered by the passage of a ball through the first through gate 66.

In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. The segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be viewed from an opening in the center of this center frame 86.

The segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800 of this embodiment perform decorative display and displacement operations according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, while the display of the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B. Note that instead of the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800, for example, a liquid crystal display may be used to display the game status.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the first through gate 66. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the first electric device 520 attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities to have the first electric device 520 of the second winning port 140 open. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the first electric device 520 is opened for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the first electric device 520 is opened for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The first through gate 66 is attached to the game board in the area to the right of the variable display unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board to pass through as they flow down the game board. When a ball passes through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery for the second pattern is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second pattern display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" pattern is displayed as the stopping pattern of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the first through gate 66 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the segment display device 600, and the decorative pattern display device 800. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, but may be three or more. In addition, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, to the right of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, there is a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter. When a ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

The second winning opening 140 is associated with a first electric device 520. This first electric device 520 is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the first through gate 66, the first electric device 520 is in an open state (expanded state), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the first electric device 520 is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate or time-saving period, the time that the first electric device 520 is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the first electric device 520 found in the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special probability mode or time-saving mode, the first electric device 520 associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the first through gate 66, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the first through gate 66 to open the first electric device 520 and aiming for a 15R special probability jackpot by winning at the second winning port 140.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment allows the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This allows the player to have more fun playing the game because it allows them to change the way they hit the ball.

A variable winning device 65 is provided on the right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to a winning of either the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show a jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate forward around the lower edge of the opening plate. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easier for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state that is a special game state. Also, the number of specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be provided, and the location of the opening is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

A space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front door 5 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first outlet 71 is disposed below the first winning hole 64.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the segment display device 600, and the decorative pattern display device 800, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the settings of the display modes of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors KM1, KM2, and KM3.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the mode displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800, or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the displayed mode is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed displayed mode is sent to the display control device 114 so that the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 display decorations according to the changed displayed mode. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third pattern, which is the main image to be displayed on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. The display control device 114 displays various decorations on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 according to commands sent from this audio lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives commands (display commands) from the display control device 114 that indicate the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. Based on the display commands received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113, the segment display device 600, and the decorative pattern display device 800, and controls the display of the third pattern variation performance and the like on the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 based on commands received from the audio lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the audio lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800. The audio lamp control device 113 can match the display of the segment display device 600 and the decorative pattern display device 800 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power failures, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the schematic configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. Note that FIG. 13 illustrates the state in which the winning port unit 500 has been disassembled from the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning port unit 500 is inserted from the front side into the opening 13a formed below the play area defined by two rails 76, 77 erected on the front side of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails. The detailed structure of the winning port unit 500 will be described later.

Next, the schematic configuration of the operation unit 300 will be described with reference to Figs. 6 to 9. Fig. 6 is a perspective front view of the operation unit 300. Fig. 7 is an exploded perspective front view of the operation unit 300. Figs. 8 and 9 are front views of the operation unit 300.

In addition, Figure 8 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair above and below the segment display device 600 are retracted to both the top and bottom, while Figure 9 shows a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair above and below the segment display device 600 are extended from the state shown in Figure 8 to a central position above and below.

As shown in Figures 6 and 7, the operating unit 300 has a rear case 400 formed in a box shape, and the decorative pattern display device 800, the segment display device 600, and the decorative unit 700 are housed in the internal space of the rear case 400.

The rear case 400 has a bottom wall 401 that is generally rectangular when viewed from the front, and outer walls 402 that stand upright from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 401 toward the front, and is formed into a box shape with one side (front side) open by the walls 401, 402. The bottom wall 401 has an opening 401a that is rectangular when viewed from the front in its center, and the segment display device 600 is disposed through the opening 401a from the rear side of the rear case 400.

Three decorative pattern display devices 800 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction in the opening 401a of the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400. The decorative pattern display device 800 is provided with an inner reel unit 810 and an outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 31) that rotate and displace in the up-down direction, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the manner in which the patterns decorated on the outer peripheral surfaces of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 change (rotate). A detailed explanation of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be given later.

The segment display device 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 401 of the rear case 400 and is configured to cover the decorative pattern display device 800. A predetermined gap is formed between the opposing base members 660 (see FIG. 49) of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the decorative pattern display device 800 is disposed in this gap, making it possible for the player to view the decorative pattern display device 800.

The segment display device 600 is also provided with a displacement member 670 (see FIG. 49) that can be displaced in front of the gap between the opposing base members 660 described above. By displacing the displacement member 670 in front of the decorative pattern display device 800, a performance can be created in which the decorative pattern display device 800 is not visible to the player. A detailed explanation of the segment display device 600 will be given later.

The decorative units 700 are formed in the shape of horizontally elongated rectangular boxes when viewed from the front, and are arranged in pairs above and below the segment display device 600. The decorative units 700 are made of a transparent resin material, and are shaped to resemble the logo, title, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. An LED board that emits light is also arranged inside the decorative unit 700, and is formed so that light can be emitted toward the player.

Next, the prize winning port unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 10 to 29. First, the configuration of the prize winning port unit 500 will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 13.

Figure 10(a) is a front view of the winning port unit 500, and Figure 10(b) is a rear view of the winning port unit 500. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective front view of the winning port unit 500, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective rear view of the winning port unit 500. Figure 13 is an exploded perspective view of the base member 510 and the first electric role 520.

As shown in Figures 10 to 13, the winning slot unit 500 is mainly formed with a base member 510 arranged on the front side of the game board 13 (see Figure 5), a first electric device 520 rotatably supported on the inside of the base member 510, and a drive unit 530 that applies a driving force to the first electric device 520.

The base member 510 is formed by fastening a front base 511 arranged on the front side to a rear base 512 arranged at a predetermined distance from the front base 511.

The front base 511 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long and rectangular when viewed from the front, and is formed from a transparent resin material. The front base 511 is mainly formed with a first protrusion 511a that protrudes from the upper end of the left-right center toward the rear side, a second protrusion 511b that protrudes from the lower end of the left-right center toward the rear side, and a third protrusion 511c that protrudes from the second protrusion 511b at a position separated by a predetermined gap in the left-right direction.

The front base 511 is disposed in a position where its front surface is visible to the player, and a pattern is formed on the front surface using projections and recesses.

The first protrusion 511a is a plate member that prevents a game ball from being sent to the second winning hole 140 formed in the rear base 512 when the first electric device 520 described below is in a closed state (when the tips of the blade members 520L, 520R are located at the top of the rotation axis (shaft member JB1)).

In other words, the first protrusion 511a is formed at the upper part between the pair of opposing blade members 520L, 520R in the closed state, and the distance between the first electric device 520 and the first protrusion 511a is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

The top surface of the first protrusion 511a is formed so as to slope downward from approximately the center position in the left-right direction toward both left and right ends. This allows a game ball sent to the top of the first protrusion 511a to roll along its top surface and fall (flow downward).

The second protrusion 511b is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape protruding from the rear side of the front base 511, and the vertical position of its upper end surface is set lower than the bottom surface of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 512. The second protrusion 511b is mainly formed with an erect portion 511b1 erected in front of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 512, engagement portions 511b2 protruding from both the left and right ends of the erect portion 511b1, and a recessed portion 511b3 recessed into the bottom surface portion.

In addition, a base member 511f equipped with an LED that irradiates light to the underside of the standing portion 511b1 is disposed on the second protrusion 511b. The LED of the base member 511f is disposed in such a manner that it irradiates light upward. Thus, the LED can emit light around the second winning opening 140.

The erected portion 511b1 is formed by standing up from the upper end of the second protrusion 511b, and two are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, with their erected tips connected to each other. In addition, the upper surface of the erected portion 511b1 is formed with a downward inclination toward the second winning opening 140 (back side), and the vertical position of the end on the second winning opening 140 side is set to a height that matches the bottom surface of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, a game ball sent to the upper part of the erected portion 511b1 can roll toward the second winning opening 140. Therefore, a game ball sent to the upper part of the erected portion 511b1 can enter the second winning opening 140.

The connecting portion of the standing portions 511b1 arranged side by side is formed with a shape in which the circumferential center position is concave downward. This makes it easier for a game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 to remain in the left-right center position of the standing portion 511b1. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 can be quickly switched to the second winning opening 140 side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball sent to the upper part of the standing portion 511b1 from colliding with a game ball sent later and being pushed outward, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140.

The engaging portion 511b2 is a portion that engages with the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, which will be described later, and is formed by protruding from both the left and right sides of the base end portion of the erecting portion 511b1 toward the center of the pivot support portion 511d, which will be described later.

The recessed portion 511b3 is a recess for forming a space for inserting a screwdriver when fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512. This allows a screw to be inserted into the through hole 511b4 formed through the rear side surface of the recessed portion 511b3.

The third protrusion 511c is a plate member that rolls the game ball into the first outlet 71 formed on the rear base 512, and is formed adjacent to both the left and right outer sides of the first outlet 71 that are formed in two places on the rear base 512, sandwiching the second winning hole 140. In other words, the third protrusion 511c is formed at a position spaced apart in the left-right direction by the left-right dimension of the second protrusion 511b and the first outlet 71.

The bottom surface of each of the third protrusions 511c is formed with a downward incline toward the adjacent first outlet 71 (toward the center in the left-right direction of the front base 511 (left-right direction in Figure 10 (a))), and the lowest position is set higher than the bottom surface of the first outlet 71. Therefore, a game ball sent to the top of the third protrusion 511c can be made to roll toward the first outlet 71 and enter the first outlet 71.

The shaft support portion 511d is formed in a circular ring shape protruding from the rear side of the front base 511, and two of them are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 10(a)) sandwiching the standing portion 511b1. The inner diameter of the shaft support portion 511d is formed to be larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1 described later. Therefore, the shaft member JB1 can be inserted inside the shaft support portion 511d.

The rear base 512 is formed from a horizontally elongated rectangular plate-like body that is larger in front view than the front base 511. Therefore, the player can directly see the front surface of the rear base 512 that does not overlap with the front base 511 in the front-to-rear direction.

In addition, since the front base 511 is made of a transparent material, the rear base 512 can be seen through the front base 511 in the area where the front base 511 overlaps in front. Furthermore, the player can see the game ball being thrown between the opposing rear base 512 and front base 511 through the front base 511.

The rear base 512 is formed mainly with a first winning opening 64 formed at the upper end on the front side, a second winning opening 140 formed below the first winning opening 64, a first outlet 71 formed on either side of the second winning opening 140, and a general winning opening 63 formed above the first outlet 71 on the right side when viewed from the front.

The first winning hole 64 is recessed downward from the upper end of the front base 511 at approximately the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 10(a)), and is formed to protrude in both the front and rear directions along the recessed edge. In addition, the protruding tip on the front side (the front side of the paper in Figure 10(a)) is blocked by a plate member.

The recessed shape of the first winning hole 64 is formed to a size that allows a game ball to be inserted inside, and its bottom surface (the inner surface below the direction of gravity) is formed to be inclined toward the rear side. This allows a game ball that enters the first winning hole 64 to be sent to the rear side of the game board 13.

The second winning opening 140 is formed through the first winning opening 64 on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 10(a)). The second winning opening 140 is formed through the first winning opening 64 in a square shape with dimensions larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Therefore, the game ball can be sent to the back side of the game board 13 through the second winning opening 140. The second winning opening 140 also has recesses 140a recessed into the left and right inner side surfaces.

The recess 140a is curved and recessed around the axis of the shaft hole 512a. This allows the protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right blade members 520L, 520R, which will be described later, to be accommodated inside. In other words, the inside of the second winning hole 140 allows the game ball to pass through, and the protrusions 523L, 523R are inserted through it.

The shaft holes 512a are recessed from the front to the rear on both the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 512. The shaft holes 512a are grooves for inserting the shaft member JB1 (described later) into the interior, and are formed in a circular shape with a diameter larger than the diameter of the shaft member JB1.

The first outlet 71 is formed penetrating both the left and right sides of the second winning hole 140. The first outlet 71 is a hole for collecting game balls that have flowed down the game area formed on the front of the game board 13, and is formed as a horizontally elongated rectangle when viewed from the front, with its width dimension in the vertical direction (short direction) set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the bottom surface (the inner surface below the direction of gravity) of the first outlet 71 is formed so that it is inclined toward the rear side. Therefore, game balls that enter the first outlet 71 can be sent to the rear side of the game board 13.

The first outlet 71 is formed with a guide wall 512b that is connected to its bottom surface and protrudes toward the front side. The guide wall 512b is a member that receives the game balls that have flowed down the play area with its upper surface and sends them to the first outlet 71, and its upper surface is formed with a downward incline toward the rear side.

In addition, multiple ribs extending in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side on the bottom surface (lower surface) of the guide wall 512b. This improves the rigidity of the guide wall 512b. As a result, damage to the guide wall 512b can be suppressed when a game ball that has flowed down the play area collides with the upper surface of the guide wall 512b.

The front base 511 and the rear base 512 are fastened together by the through hole 511b4 and the fastening hole 512c formed through the rear base 512 at a position corresponding to the through hole 511b4. That is, with the front base 511 and the rear base 512 combined in the front-rear direction, a screwdriver can be inserted into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, and the screw can be fastened to the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4.

The first electric device 520 is formed as a single unit with a left wing member 520L located on the left side of the second winning opening 140 when viewed from the front, and a right wing member 520R located on the right side when viewed from the front.

The only difference between the left and right feather members 520L and 520R is the position of the bulges 524L and 524R described below. The other members are formed symmetrically on either side of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, apart from the bulges 524L and 524R, only the left feather member 520L will be described, and a detailed description of the right feather member 520R will be omitted.

The left and right feather members 520L and 520R can be moved between a first state (closed state) in which the corners farther from the through hole 521L are positioned upward in the direction of gravity, and a second state (open state) in which the corners farther from the through hole 521L are displaced to a position spaced outward in the left-right direction of the second winning opening 140, by the drive of the solenoid 531 of the drive unit 530 described later, and the first state will be described unless otherwise specified. In addition, the opposing sides of the left and right feather members 520L and 520R in the first state will be described using the reference characters 526L and 526R.

The left wing member 520L is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with dimensions in the front-rear direction that are larger than the diameter of a game ball. The left wing member 520L is mainly formed by a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the gravity direction, a recessed portion 522L recessed from the front side to the rear side around the through hole 521L, a protrusion 523L protruding from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the rear side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the through hole 521L side, a bulge portion 524L protruding from the side surface 526L, and an axis member JB1 inserted inside the through hole 521L. A detailed explanation of the bulge portion 524L will be given later.

The shaft member JB1 is a cylindrical rod member made of a metal material. The shaft member JB1 is an axis that rotatably holds the left and right blade members 520L, 520R, and is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 521L.

The shaft member JB1 is formed so that its axial length is approximately the same as or slightly shorter than the distance from the recessed tip surface of the shaft hole 512a to the rear side of the front base 511. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and the rear base 512, one end of the shaft member JB1 (the end on the rear base 512 side) is inserted into the shaft hole 512a, and the other end (the end on the front base 511 side) is inserted into the shaft support portion 511d, thereby holding the shaft member JB1 between the front base 511 and the rear base 512.

The dimension of the left wing member 520L in the front-to-rear direction is set to be smaller than the distance between the opposing front base 511 and rear base 512. Therefore, when assembling the front base 511 and rear base 512, the shaft member JB1 is inserted into the through-hole 521L, so that the wing member 520L can be rotatably held between the opposing front base 511 and rear base 512.

The recess 522L is recessed from the front side around the axis of the through hole 521L, and the recess dimension is set to be smaller than the protruding distance of the pivot support 511d. In addition, the distance dimension from the axis of the through hole 521L to the inner peripheral surface of the recess 522L is set to be larger than the radius dimension from the axis of the pivot support 511d to the outer peripheral surface.

Therefore, when the feather member 520L is disposed between the front base 511 and the rear base 512, the front of the feather member 520L and the rear of the front base 511 can be prevented from coming into contact with the ground, and the grounding portion between the feather member 520L and the front base 511 can be the recess 522L and the pivot support portion 511d. Therefore, the grounding between the feather member 520L and the front base 511 can be partial. As a result, when the feather member 520L is rotated by driving the solenoid 531 described later, the resistance acting on the feather member 520L can be reduced, making it easier to rotate the feather member 520L.

In addition, because the pivot support 511d can be housed inside the recess 522L, the distance between the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be reduced. As a result, the distance in the front-to-rear direction of the prize winning unit 500 can be reduced.

Here, conventionally, there have been gaming machines in which the shaft member JB1 is fitted into the through hole 521L of the blade member 520L.

However, in conventional gaming machines, because the shaft member JB1 is fitted inside the through hole 521L, if the feather member 520L is damaged, it is necessary to replace the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 when replacing parts. This causes the problem of high parts costs.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shaft member JB1 is simply inserted into the through hole 521L formed in the feather member 520L, and the feather member 520L and the shaft member JB1 can be arranged separately in the winning opening unit 500. Therefore, when the feather member 520L is damaged, the only part that needs to be replaced is the feather member 520L. As a result, it is possible to prevent parts costs from increasing.

As described above, the front base 511 can be fastened to the rear base 512 from the front side of the front base 511. Therefore, if the feather member 520L is damaged, the front base 511 can be removed from the rear base 512 with the winning port unit 500 attached to the game board 13. As a result, the feather member 520L can be easily replaced.

In other words, when removing the front base 511 from the rear side of the rear base 512, it is necessary to remove the winning port unit 500 from the game board 13 before removing the front base 511 from the rear base 512. However, since the front base 511 is formed so that it can be removed from the front side, it can be easily removed. As a result, it is easy to replace parts of the blade member 520L.

If the front base 511 were made removable from the front side of the rear base 512, the heads of screws and other fasteners connecting the front base 511 and rear base 512 would be visible from the player's side (front side), and there is a risk that the player's interest would be diminished if the player were to see the heads of the screws connecting the front base 511 and rear base 512.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 are fastened together using the space of the recessed portion 511b3 formed in the front base 511. That is, by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from the lower side of the front base 511, a screw can be fastened into the fastening hole 512c through the through hole 511b4. Therefore, even when the front base 511 is located on the front side of the through hole 511b4, the front base 511 and the rear base 512 can be fastened together by inserting a screwdriver obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3. Therefore, the heads of screws fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512 together can be made difficult to see from the player side (front side). As a result, the player's interest can be prevented from being ruined by seeing the heads of the screws fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512 together.

Also, the decorative pattern display device 800 and the segment display device 600, which can be seen through an opening formed in the center of the game board 13, are usually set at the player's eye level. Therefore, the winning slot unit 500 is positioned below the player's eye level. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the heads of the screws fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512, which prevents the player from losing interest by seeing the heads of the screws fastening the front base 511 and the rear base 512.

The front base 511 is made of a transparent resin material, so the heads of the screws can be seen through the front base 511. However, as described above, the front side of the front base 511 has an uneven pattern formed thereon, so light can be emitted in other directions due to differences in the thickness of the board. This makes it possible to blur the heads of the screws that can be seen through the front base 511. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being diminished.

Next, the drive unit 530 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 14 to 16. Fig. 14 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 530. Figs. 15(a) and 15(b) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric role 520. Figs. 16(a) and 16(b) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric role 520.

Note that Fig. 15(a) and Fig. 16(a) show the first electric device 520 in a first state, and Fig. 15(b) and Fig. 16(b) show the first electric device 520 in a second state.

As shown in FIG. 14, the drive unit 530 is mainly formed with a solenoid 531, a sliding member 532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 533 connected to the sliding member 532, a first case member 534 in which the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are arranged in a displaceable state, and a second case member 536 attached to the back side of the first case member 534.

The solenoid 531 is mainly comprised of a main body 531a that has an electric wire inside and generates electromagnetic force when power is passed through the wire, a movable body 531b that is slidably disposed inside the main body, and an engagement part 531c that is attached to the tip of the movable body.

The main body 531a is formed in a rectangular column shape that is long in the front-to-rear direction, and electric wires are arranged inside. A recess is formed on the front side of the main body 531a, which is recessed on the back side, and the movable body 531b, which is formed in a cylindrical shape, is arranged inside the recess.

The movable body 531b is made of a metal material, and can slide toward the rear side (inside the main body 531a) when power is applied to the wires of the main body 531a to generate electromagnetic force.

The engaging portion 531c is attached to the end of the movable body 531b opposite the main body portion 531a. The engaging portion 531c is formed in a disk shape with an outer diameter larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b, and its axis is positioned approximately in line with the axis of the movable body 531b.

The engaging portion 531c is inserted into an engaging groove 532a2 of the sliding member 532, which will be described later. This allows the sliding member 532 to be displaced in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 15(a)) in conjunction with the displacement of the movable body 531b.

The sliding member 532 is formed in a roughly E-shape when viewed from above, and is mainly composed of a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction, two first protrusions 532b protruding from both the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side, and a second protrusion 532c located midway between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

The sliding member 532 is formed so that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between the connecting portions in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534 described below. This allows the sliding member 532 to be housed and positioned inside the first case member 534.

The connecting portion 532a is mainly formed with a recess 532a1 recessed on the back side, an engagement groove 532a2 recessed from the top side connecting to the front side of the recess 532a1, and a notch 532a3 formed on both the left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c.

As described above, the recess 532a1 is a recess that prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from abutting against the connecting portion 532a when the engaging portion 531c of the solenoid 531 is inserted into the engaging groove 532a2. That is, the recess 532a1 is formed in an arc shape whose recessed surface is larger than the outer diameter of the movable body 531b. This prevents the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from abutting against the connecting portion 532a.

The engagement groove 532a2 is formed connected to the front side of the recess 532a1, and the depth of the recess from the top surface side in the direction of gravity is set to be greater than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c. The engagement groove 532a2 is also set such that its width dimension in the left-right direction is greater than the diameter of the engagement portion 531c, and its width dimension in the front-rear direction is approximately the same as or greater than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement portion 531c. Therefore, the engagement portion 531c can be inserted inside the engagement groove 532a2.

The notches 532a3 are slits that facilitate elastic deformation of the sliding member 532 when connecting the first protrusion 532b (described later) to the rotating member 533, and are formed on both the left and right sides of the base end of the second protrusion 532c as described above, and are also notched toward the back side.

The first protrusion 532b has an engagement hole 532d formed through it in the left-right direction. The engagement hole 532d is formed as a long hole that is long in the front-rear direction, and is formed mainly with a first opening 532d1 recessed downward in the direction of gravity from the end on the front side, and a second opening 532d2 recessed downward in the direction of gravity from the end on the rear side. A detailed explanation of the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2 will be given later.

The vertical width of the engagement hole 532d at the center in the front-rear direction (part other than the first opening 532d1 and the second opening 532d2) is set to be larger than the vertical width of the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, which will be described later. This allows the protrusion 533b to be positioned inside the engagement hole 532d.

As described above, the second protrusion 532c is formed between the two first protrusions 532b and protrudes from the front side. The second protrusion 532c also has a standing wall 532c1 that stands downward at the tip side opposite the connecting portion 532a. A detailed explanation of the standing wall 532c1 will be given later.

The rotating member 533 is formed by two plate-like bodies formed in a roughly L-shape when viewed from the side, arranged side by side at a specified width in the left-right direction, with the opposing ends connected by a connecting portion 533a. The gap between the two opposing plate-like bodies of the rotating member 533 is set to be larger than the diameter of a game ball. This allows the game ball to pass inside the rotating member 533 (between the two opposing plate-like bodies).

The width dimension of the rotating member 533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer faces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set smaller than the dimension between the inner faces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. This allows the rotating member 533 to be positioned between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

The rotating member 533 is mainly composed of a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes on both the left and right sides from the bent portion of the roughly L-shape in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes on both the left and right sides from one end of the roughly L-shape in side view, and a drive part 533d that is recessed into the tip of the other end of the roughly L-shape in side view.

The rotating shaft 533c is formed to protrude from both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the first case member 534. In addition, the protruding dimension of the rotating shaft 533c is set to be larger than the thickness dimension in the left-right direction of the first case member 534. Therefore, by receiving the rotating shaft 533c inside the recess 534a of the first case member 534 described below and assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534, the rotating member 533 can be held in a rotatable state relative to the first case member 534 and the second case member 535.

The protrusions 533b are formed to protrude from both the left and right outer sides of the rotating member 533, and the distance between the protruding tip surfaces is set to be approximately the same as the distance between the left and right outer side surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. In addition, the protrusion dimension of the protrusions 533b is set to be larger than the width dimension of the first protrusions 532b in the left-right direction. Therefore, by inserting the protrusions 533b into the engagement holes 532d of the first protrusions 532b, the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected.

The sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533 can be connected by elastically deforming the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532 left and right to widen the space between the two opposing first protrusions 532b. In this case, as described above, the notch 532a3 is formed in the sliding member 532, which makes it easier to widen the space between the two opposing first protrusions 532b. As a result, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 can be easily connected.

Furthermore, the distance between the opposing inner sides of the first case member 534 in the left-right direction is set to be approximately the same as the distance between the opposing outer sides of the first protrusions 532b, or slightly larger than the distance between the opposing outer sides of the first protrusions 532b. This makes it possible to prevent the first protrusions 532b from elastically deforming outward in the left-right direction when the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are disposed inside the first case member 534. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 from becoming disconnected.

The drive unit 533d is formed with a recess from the front side toward the rear side. The drive unit 533d can accommodate the protrusions 523L, 523R of the wing member 520L on the inside. In other words, the drive unit 533d is set to have a dimension larger in the vertical direction than the protrusions 523L, 523R. By accommodating the protrusions 523L, 523R in the drive unit 533d, the first electric role 520 can be displaced between the first state and the second state in accordance with the displacement of the drive unit 533d. The displacement of the first electric role 520 will be described in detail later.

The first case member 534 is formed in a generally square shape when viewed from the front, with an opening inside, and is formed to extend in the front-to-rear direction. The lower side of the rear side of the first case member 534 is cut out, and the second case member 535 can be disposed in the cutout portion.

The first case member 534 is formed mainly with a recess 534a recessed into the front side of the cutout portion on the rear side, and an erected portion 534b erected on the bottom surface on the inner circumference side.

As described above, the recess 534a is a recess that accommodates the rotating shaft 533c of the rotating member 533 inside, and is recessed into a shape larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft 533c. Therefore, by assembling the second case member 535 to the first case member 534 with the rotating shaft 533c accommodated inside, the rotating member 533 can be disposed inside the first case member 534.

The upright portion 534b is set so that its upright tip surface is at the same height as the lower inner peripheral surface of the second winning opening 140 of the rear base 512, and is extended toward the rear side and formed with a downward incline. As a result, when the drive unit 530 is positioned on the rear side of the rear base 512, a game ball that has entered the second winning opening 140 can be sent to the second case member 535 by rolling over the upper surface of the upright portion 534b.

The second case member 535 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with a predetermined thickness on the rear side. The second case member 535 has a through hole 535a formed through it in the vertical direction.

The through hole 535a has an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball, and as described above, the game ball that is sent to the second case member 535 by rolling with the upper part of the standing part 534b can be sent downward through the through hole 535a. This allows the game ball that flows down the game area and enters the second winning port 140 to be collected.

Next, the displacement of the first electric device 520 will be explained with reference to Figures 15 and 16.

As shown in Figures 15(a) and 16(a), when the first electric device 520 is in the first state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is disposed around the movable body 531b and is protruded to the front side (left side in Figure 15(a)) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) interposed between the main body 531a and the connecting part 532a.

In this case, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is positioned on the back side (second opening 532d2 side) of the engagement hole 532d. Also, the center of gravity of the rotating member 533 in a side view is positioned between the drive unit 533d and the rotating shaft 533c. In other words, the rotating member 533 is constantly subjected to a rotational force around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c in a direction that pushes the drive unit 533d downward.

Therefore, even when the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is positioned on the back side of the engagement hole 532d (the second opening 533d2 side), it can remain at the top without being guided to the inside of the second opening 533d2 (below the engagement hole 532d (lower side in Figure 15 (a))).

In addition, because the drive unit 533d is pushed downward, the protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R housed inside the drive unit 533d are pushed downward. As a result, the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are placed in a state (first state (see FIG. 16(a))) in which the corners farther from the through holes 521L, 521R are positioned above the through holes 521L, 521R.

As shown in Figures 15(b) and 16(b), when power is applied to the body 531a of the solenoid 531, the electromagnetic force generated in the body 531a draws the movable body 531b into the body 531a.

As a result, as the movable body 531b is displaced, the sliding member 532 connected to the tip end of the movable body 531b is slid backward (to the right in FIG. 15(b)). As described above, the rotating member 533 is constantly subjected to a rotational force around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c in a direction that presses the driving part 533d downward, so that the protrusion 533b housed inside the engagement hole 532d of the sliding member 532 slides inside it without getting caught on the base end portion of the second opening 533d2.

The protrusion 533b sliding inside the second opening 533d2 comes into contact with the end of the engagement hole 532d on the front side (first opening 532d1 side) at the displacement end position of the movable body 531b, and is displaced toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 15(b)). In this case, the protrusion 533b rotates and displaces around the axis of the rotation shaft 533c, so that the protrusion 533b can be accommodated inside the first opening 532d1. In other words, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape corresponding to the displacement of the protrusion 533b.

In addition, since the rotating member 533 rotates around the axis of the rotating shaft 533c, the driving unit 533d can be displaced upward (upward in FIG. 15(b)). As a result, the blade member 520L is rotated around the axis of the through holes 521L, 521R, and the corners on the far side from the through holes 521L, 521R are displaced outward to the left and right (second state (see FIG. 16(b))).

On the other hand, the transition from the second state to the first state is achieved by cutting off the supply of power to the main body 531a of the solenoid 531. This causes the electromagnetic force generated in the main body 531a to disappear, and the movable body 531b is pushed out to the front side (left side in FIG. 15(a)) by the biasing force of a biasing spring (not shown) disposed around the movable body 531b and interposed between the main body 531a and the connecting portion 532a. As a result, the first electric role 520 can be displaced to the position of the first state.

As described above, the first opening 532d1 is formed in a shape that corresponds to the displacement of the protrusion 533b, so that the recess depth of the first opening 532d1 on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 15(b)) is formed deeper toward the rear side (right side in FIG. 15(b)).

As a result, when the first electric device 520 is shifted from the second state to the first state, the base end portion of the first opening 532d1 is caused to collide with the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533, making it easier to shift the protrusion 533b in the direction of gravity.

Next, the operation of the second protrusion 532c will be described with reference to Figure 17. Figures 17(a) and 17(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 10(a). Note that Figure 17(a) illustrates the state in which the first electric device 520 is positioned in the first state, and Figure 17(b) illustrates the state in which the first electric device 520 is positioned in the second state.

As shown in FIG. 17(a), when the first electric device 520 is in the first state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right blade members 520L, 520R are positioned near the first protrusion 511a. This prevents game balls from flowing down between the opposing left and right blade members 520L, 520R when the first electric device 520 is in the first state.

As described above, the solenoid 531 has the movable body 531b protruding from the inside of the main body 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the front side (left side of FIG. 17(a)). In other words, the erected wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is positioned near the second winning opening 140.

In this case, the distance dimension L1 from the tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in Figure 17(a))) to the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, even if the first electric device 520 is damaged and the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is protruding forward, if the game ball is allowed to flow between the opposing left and right blade members 520L, 520R, the game ball can be prevented from entering the second winning opening 140 and rolling. In other words, the game ball rolling on the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be made to collide with the standing wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532, stopping the rolling of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the store would be at a disadvantage even if the player continued playing when the first electric device 520 is damaged.

In this embodiment, the sensor device SE1 that detects that a gaming ball has entered the second winning opening 140 is disposed in the flow path of the gaming ball in the second case member 535. Therefore, in order to detect that the gaming ball has passed through the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is necessary to make the gaming ball roll to the second case member 535. Therefore, by stopping the rolling of the gaming ball inside the first case member 534, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from detecting that the gaming ball has entered the second winning opening 140.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the first electric device 520 is in the second state, the far corners of the through holes 521L, 521R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are spaced farther from the first protrusion 511a than in the first state, and the distance is made larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball flowing down the game area to be received by the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R and rolled into the second winning hole 140. In other words, when the first electric device 520 is in the second state, it becomes easier to insert the game ball into the second winning hole 140.

As described above, the solenoid 531 is in a state in which the movable body 531b is pulled inside the main body 531a. Therefore, the sliding member 532 connected to the movable body 531b (engagement portion 531c) is positioned on the rear side (right side in FIG. 17(b)). In other words, the erected wall 532c1 of the second protrusion 532c is positioned farther away from the second winning opening 140 than in the first state.

In this case, the distance dimension L2 from the tip of the erected wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in Figure 17 (b))) to the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball.

As a result, when the first electric device 520 is in the second state, the left and right blade members 520L, 520R are displaced, making it easier for the game ball flowing down the play area to enter the second winning hole 140, and the game ball that has entered the second winning hole 140 can be sent to the second case member 535 by rolling the upright portion 534b formed on the first case member 534.

Furthermore, the displacement direction of the standing wall 532c1 can be slid in a direction that is approximately the same as the rolling direction of the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, so that when the feather members 520L, 520R are damaged (or opened due to fraudulent activity), the game ball that has collided with the standing wall 532c1 and stopped can be prevented from being pushed out in the opposite direction to the rolling direction due to the displacement of the standing wall 532c1. This can prevent the game ball from getting stuck in the second winning opening 140 when the first electric device 520 is opened by driving the solenoid 531 to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 140. As a result, when the first electric device 520 is opened, the game ball can be smoothly guided inside the second winning opening.

Next, referring to Figures 18 and 19, we will explain what happens when the first electric device 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state due to a player's fraudulent behavior. Figures 18(a) and 18(b) are front views of the winning slot unit 500. Figures 19(a) and 19(b) are side views of the first electric device 520 and the drive unit 530.

In addition, in Fig. 18(a) and Fig. 18(b), the front base 511 is shown as transparent to facilitate understanding. Also, Fig. 19(a) illustrates the first electric role 520 and the drive unit 530 in the first state, and Fig. 19(b) illustrates the state when only the first electric role 520 is displaced from the first state.

As shown in Figures 18 and 19, when the first electric device 520 in the first state is forcibly displaced to the second state by a player's illegal behavior (cheating), the protrusions 523L, 523R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are displaced to the inside of the second opening 532d2 of the engagement hole 532d. In other words, a space is formed in which the protrusions 523L, 523R can be displaced, so that the first electric device 520 can be prevented from being damaged when the first electric device 520 is forcibly displaced.

Next, referring to Figures 20(a) and 11(b), the displacement of the erected portion 523c1 when the first electric device 520 is displaced due to a player's fraudulent behavior will be described. Figure 20(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 500 taken along line XXa-XXa in Figure 18(a), and Figure 20(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 500 taken along line XXb-XXb in Figure 18(b).

As shown in Figures 20(a) and 20(b), when the first electric device 520 in the first state is forcibly rotated by the player's biasing action, the solenoid 531 and sliding member 532 of the drive unit 530 are not displaced, and only the first electric device 520 and the rotating member 533 are rotationally displaced.

As described above, when the first electric device 520 is in the first state, the distance dimension L1 from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in Figure 20(a))) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

Here, conventionally, a gaming machine is known that includes a second winning opening 140 that is formed to allow game balls to enter, a pair of feather members 520L, 520R arranged on either side of the second winning opening 140, a driving means (solenoid 531) that applies a driving force to the pair of feather members 520L, 520R to open or close them, and a restricting means that, when the pair of feather members 520L, 520R are opened by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), they are positioned at an allowable position that allows game balls to enter the second winning opening 140, and, when the pair of feather members 520L, 520R are closed by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), they are positioned at a restricting position that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening 140.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted. For example, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the permissible position by forcibly opening the pair of blade members 520L, 520R from the outside. This creates a problem in that the effect of restricting the illegal entry of game balls into the second winning hole 140 is insufficient.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the arrangement of the standing wall 532c1 is formed so that it can be maintained in the restricted position when the pair of feather members 520L, 520R are closed or when the pair of feather members 520L, 520R are open from the outside, so that the standing wall 532c1 can be prevented from being displaced to the permitted position. This makes it easier to restrict the illegal entry of game balls into the second winning hole 140.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is closed or when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is open from the outside, the sliding member 532 is operated to set the distance dimension L3 from the upright tip of the upright wall 532c1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(b))) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, even if the first electric device 520 is made capable of sending a game ball to the second winning hole 140 due to a player's fraudulent act, the game ball can be prevented from entering the inside of the second winning hole 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be collided with the upright wall 532c1 of the sliding member 532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric device 520 is put into the second state (allowing the game ball to be sent to the second winning hole 140) due to a player's fraudulent behavior, it becomes easier to restrict the game ball from being fraudulently sent to the second winning hole 140.

In this case, the erected wall 532c1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 can be formed connected to the sliding member 532 that displaces the pair of blade members 520L, 520R, so there is no need for a separate member to prevent the ball from being illegally entered into the second winning opening 140. This allows the number of parts to be reduced, preventing an increase in manufacturing costs.

Next, referring to Figures 21 and 22, we will explain the case where the second protrusion 532c is further pushed back when the first electric device 520 is put into the second state due to the player's fraudulent behavior. Figures 21(a) and 21(b) are side views of the first electric device 520 and the drive unit 530. Figure 22(a) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in range XXIIa of Figure 21(a), and Figure 22(b) is a partially enlarged side view of the drive unit 530 in range XXIIb of Figure 21(b).

As shown in Figures 21 and 22, a protrusion 532d3 is formed on the inside of the second opening 532d2, protruding from the inner surface on the front side (left side of Figure 22(a)). In addition, a notch 533b1 is formed on the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 by cutting into the outer circumferential surface in a side view.

The protrusion 532d3 and the cutout portion 533b1 are formed to have corresponding outer diameters. That is, the protruding shape of the protrusion 532d3 in a side view and the cutout shape of the cutout portion 533b1 are substantially the same.

Therefore, when the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) is pushed backward from the state where only the first electric device 520 is in the second state due to a fraudulent act as shown in FIG. 21(a) and FIG. 22(a), the protrusion 532d3 is accommodated inside the notch 533b1, and the displacement of the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the rear side is restricted. As a result, when the first electric device 520 is in the second state due to a fraudulent act by the player, the game ball can be prevented from entering the second winning hole 140 and being sent by rolling along the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534.

In addition, in this embodiment, one of the side surfaces of the protrusion 532d3 is formed to be inclined upward toward the rear surface side (see FIG. 22(a)). This makes it difficult for the protrusion 532d3 to slip out of the cutout portion 533b1 when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted inside the cutout portion 533b1.

That is, since the side of the protrusion 532d3 is formed inclined upward toward the rear side, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the notch 532b1 and a force is applied to further push the standing wall 532c1 (sliding member 532) toward the rear side, the direction of the force acting on the contact surface between the protrusion 532d3 and the notch 532b1 can be set to the direction in which the protrusion 532d3 enters the inside of the notch 532b1. Therefore, when the protrusion 532d3 is inserted into the inside of the notch 533b1, the protrusion 532d3 can be made difficult to come out of the notch 533b1. As a result, when the first electric role 520 is put into the second state due to a player's fraudulent behavior, it is possible to reliably suppress the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140 and being sent by rolling on the standing part 534b of the first case member 534.

In other words, a transmission mechanism is provided that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. The transmission mechanism includes a sliding member 532 that is slidably displaced between an open slide position (position shown in FIG. 17(b)) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 17(a)) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), and a sliding member 532 that is rotated to an open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position to open the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and that is rotated to a closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. The ball is provided with a rotating member 533, and a standing wall 532c1 is disposed on the sliding member 532. When the sliding member 532 is slid to the open slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is disposed in the allowable position, and when the sliding member 532 is slid to the closed slide position, the standing wall 532c1 is disposed in the restricted position. When the sliding member 532 is disposed in the closed slide position and the rotating member 533 is disposed in the open rotation position, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other, so that the sliding member 532 is restricted from sliding to the open slide position, making it easier to restrict illegal entry of game balls into the second winning opening 140.

In other words, when the pair of closed feather members 520L, 520R is forcibly opened from the outside, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the open rotation position while the sliding member 532 is in the closed slide position. In this state, the rotating member 533 and the sliding member 532 are engaged with each other to restrict the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position, so that the restricting means can be maintained in the restricting position (the restricting means can be prevented from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the allowable position). As a result, even if the pair of feather members 520L, 520R is forcibly opened from the outside and a game ball is passed between the pair of feather members 520L, 520R, the restricting means can restrict the game ball from entering the second winning hole 140.

Furthermore, an engagement hole 532d is provided extending from one of the sliding member 532 and the rotating member 533, and a protrusion 533b is provided protruding from the other. When the protrusion 533b slides along the engagement hole 532d, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 is transmitted to rotate the rotating member 533, and when the protrusion 533b engages with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position is restricted, so that the restriction is difficult to release while still achieving compactness.

That is, by utilizing the engagement hole 532d and the protrusion 533b for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the rotating member 533 to rotate it, a means for restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding member 532 to the open slide position can be formed, and since it is not necessary to provide such a means separately in another location, it is possible to achieve a correspondingly smaller size. In addition, by using a structure in which the protrusion 533b engages with the inner wall surface of the engagement hole 532d, it is possible to make unauthorized access to such an engagement portion from the outside difficult, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult to release the restriction (engagement) accordingly.

Next, the bulging portions 524L, 524R of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R will be described in detail with reference to Figures 23 and 24. Figure 23(a) is a front perspective view of the left wing member 520L, and Figure 23(b) is a front perspective view of the right wing member 520R. Figure 24(a) is a front view of the winning opening unit 500, and Figure 24(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500 taken along line XXIVb-XXIVb in Figure 24(a).

In addition, in Fig. 23(a) and Fig. 23(b), the left-right direction when viewed obliquely is reversed between Fig. 23(a) and Fig. 23(b). Also, in Fig. 24(a), the front base 511 is shown as being transparent. Furthermore, in Fig. 24(b), the front base 511 shown as being transparent in Fig. 24(a) is shown as being opaque. Also, in Fig. 24(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the sides 526L, 526R is shown by a two-dot chain line together with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is shown by the arrow F, and the rear direction is shown by the arrow B.

As shown in Figures 23 and 24, bulge 524L formed on side surface 526L of left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the through-hole 521L side and is connected to the end face on the front side (arrow F side in Figure 24(b)). On the other hand, bulge 524R formed on side surface 526R of right wing member 520R is formed at the end on the through-hole 521R side and is connected to the end face on the back side (arrow B side in Figure 24(b)).

That is, the bulge 524L of the left wing member 520L and the bulge 524R of the right wing member 520R are formed at different positions in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 24(b)).

Furthermore, a first region that continues from the tip side to the base side of the feather members 520L, 520R is formed on the side 526L, 526R, and a bulge portion 524L, 524R is formed with a size that does not abut against the game ball guided through the first region, and the first region of the side 526L, 526R of one feather member (one of the feather members 520L, 520R) of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R and the first region of the side 526L, 526R of the other feather member (the other of the feather members 520L, 520R) are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side 526L, 526R.

The bulge 524L is formed such that the end portion farther from the through hole 521L is inclined toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 24(b)) to the rear side (upper side in FIG. 24(b)). On the other hand, the bulge 524R is formed such that the end portion farther from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R from the rear side to the front side.

Next, referring to Figures 25 and 26, we will explain what happens when a game ball is sent to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right blade members 520L, 520R. Figures 25(a) and 25(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500. Figures 26(a) and 26(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500.

Note that Figures 25(a), 25(b), 26(a) and 26(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 500 in Figure 24(b). Figures 25(a) and 25(b) sequentially illustrate the transitional states of the game ball when it is sent from both sides of the first electric device 520. Figures 26(a) and 26(b) sequentially illustrate the transitional states of the game ball when it is sent only to the left wing member 520L.

As shown in Figures 25(a) and 25(b), when a game ball is sent to both sides of the first electric device 520, the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the left and right blade members 520L, 520R can be rolled to different positions in the front-rear direction by the bulges 524L, 524R.

To explain in more detail, as described above, the bulge 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed and connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, a game ball rolling on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L rolls on the side surface 526L while contacting the bulge 524L, and is thereby rolled to the rear side.

In this case, the bulge 524L is formed with the end farther from the through hole 521L inclined toward the through hole 521L from the front side (lower side in FIG. 25(b)) to the rear side (upper side in FIG. 25(b)). Therefore, when a game ball rolling on the side surface 526L comes into contact with the bulge 524L, the resistance in the rolling direction increases, preventing the game ball from stopping rolling.

On the other hand, the bulge 524R of the right wing member 520R is formed to be connected to the end face on the back side. Therefore, a game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R rolls on the side surface 526R while contacting the bulge 524R, and is thereby rolled towards the front side.

In this case, the bulge 524R is formed so that the end farther from the through hole 521R is inclined toward the through hole 521R from the rear side (upper side of FIG. 25(b)) toward the front side (lower side of FIG. 25(b)). Therefore, when a game ball rolling on the side surface 526R comes into contact with the bulge 524R, the resistance in the rolling direction increases, preventing the game ball from stopping rolling.

Therefore, the game balls rolling on the left wing member 520L side can be brought closer to the rear side, while the game balls rolling on the right wing member 520R side can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, when game balls are thrown from both the left and right sides, head-on collisions between the game balls thrown from the left and right sides can be prevented.

Here, conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that includes a ball entry opening (second winning opening 140) that is formed to allow the game ball to enter, and a guide member (first electric device 520) that has guide surfaces (sides 526L, 526R) that guide the game ball to the ball entry opening and is formed to be displaceable. An example of the guide member is a pair of wing members (wing members 520L, 520R) that have guide surfaces that guide the game ball to the ball entry opening, are arranged on either side of the ball entry opening, and are supported on a base end side so that they can rotate.

Also disclosed is a technique for providing a first groove on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) of one of the feather members (either feather member 520L, 520R) and a second groove on the entire surface of the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) of the other feather member. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, even if the game balls are simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) of one feather member (either feather member 520L, 520R) and the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) of one feather member (the other of the feather members 520L, 520R), the game balls can be biased in different directions (one toward the glass plate and the other toward the game board). Therefore, the game balls can be smoothly inserted into the second winning hole 140.

However, the above-mentioned conventional technology has a problem in that it is not possible to sufficiently deflect the gaming ball. In addition, a gaming ball that enters from one side of the guide member (either one of the vane members 520L, 520R) may pass through the guide surface (side surface 526L, 526R) and exit from the other side of the guide member (either one of the vane members 520L, 520R). In this case, the gaming ball does not enter the ball entry port (second winning port 140), which causes a problem in that the player loses interest.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the first electric device 520 has a pair of bulges 524L, 524R that protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R, and the pair of bulges 524L, 524R are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, so that the game ball guided (rolling) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R can be reliably deflected by coming into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R. As a result, the ball can be smoothly inserted into the ball entrance.

In addition, by arranging the pair of bulges 524L, 524R at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the game ball entering from one side of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R can be brought into contact with the bulges 524L, 524R. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball entering from one side of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R (either one of the feather members 520L, 520R) from passing through the pair of feather members 520L, 520R (to the other one of the feather members 520L, 520R). As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance, increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, the first electric device 520 is formed as a pair of feather members 520L, 520R arranged on either side of the second winning port 140 and rotatably supported at the base end, and the pair of bulges 524L, 524R protrude from each of the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R, and the bulge portion 524L, 524R of one of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R and the bulge portion 524L, 524R of the other feather member 520L, 520R are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, so that the game ball guided (rolling) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R can be abutted against the bulge portions 524L, 524R, thereby reliably displacing the game ball. As a result, the balls can be smoothly inserted into the second winning hole 140 and ball clogging can be prevented.

In addition, the bulge portions 524L, 524R of one feather member 520L, 520R and the bulge portions 524L, 524R of the other feather member 520L, 520R are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 526L, 526R (the direction from the tip end to the base end of the feather members 520L, 520R), so that when a game ball that has entered the side surface 526L, 526R of one feather member 520L, 520R reaches the side surface 526L, 526R of the other feather member 520L, 520R, the game ball can be abutted against the bulge portions 524L, 524R of the other feather member 520L, 520R. This prevents a game ball that has entered the side surface 526L, 526R of one of the blade members 520L, 520R from passing through the side surface 526L, 526R of the other blade member. As a result, the game ball can enter the second winning hole 140, increasing the player's interest.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524R are formed at different positions in the front-to-rear direction on the left and right blade members 520L, 520R, respectively, so that game balls rolling from the left and right can be made to roll to different positions in the front-to-rear direction. This makes it possible to prevent head-on collisions between game balls sent from both the left and right sides. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time it takes for the game ball to enter the second winning hole 140 from being shortened.

In other words, by making the collision positions of the game balls different in the front-to-rear direction on the left and right, as shown in Figure 25(b), the game ball on the left side that is brought closer to the back side is more likely to bounce back to the back side (upper side of Figure 25(b)) upon impact. On the other hand, the game ball on the right side that is brought closer to the front side is more likely to bounce back to the front side (lower side of Figure 25(b)) upon impact.

This makes it easier for one game ball (in this embodiment, the one rolling on the left wing member 520L) to enter the second winning opening 140, and by bouncing the other game ball to the front side, it is possible to prevent the game ball from moving too far away from the second winning opening 140 upon collision. Therefore, the second game ball that enters the second winning opening 140 later can enter the second winning opening 140 more quickly. As a result, when game balls are sent to both the left and right sides of the first electric device 520, the time it takes for the game balls on both sides to enter the second winning opening 140 can be shortened, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, the bulges 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at a position closer to the base end (through hole 521 side) than to the tip end of the feather members 520L, 520R, so that an area is secured in which the game ball guided to the side surfaces 526L, 526R can roll before it abuts against the bulges 524L, 524R. This accordingly suppresses a decrease in the rolling speed of the game ball, allowing it to enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

Furthermore, by having the bulges 524L, 524R protrude from the side surfaces 526L, 526R at a position closer to the base end than to the tip end of the blade members 520L, 520R, the course of the game ball that has been deflected by contacting the bulges 524L, 524R can be prevented from returning to the course before the deflection before reaching the ball entrance (the end of the guide surface). In other words, the game ball can be easily sent from the side surfaces 526L, 526R to the ball entrance while remaining in a deflected state.

As described above, the side surfaces 526L, 526R are formed with a first region that continues from the tip side to the base side of the feather members 520L, 520R, and the bulges 524L, 524R are formed with a size that does not abut the game ball guided through the first region. Therefore, when the game ball that has entered the side surfaces 526L, 526R rolls through the first region, the rolling speed of the game ball is prevented from decreasing, and the game ball can be smoothly entered into the second winning hole 140.

In this case, the first region of the side 526L, 526R of one of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R (either of the feather members 520L, 520R) and the first region of the side 526L, 526R of the other feather member (either of the feather members 520L, 520R) are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side 526L, 526R. Even if the game ball is simultaneously guided (rolled) through the first region of the side 526L, 526R of one feather member (either of the feather members 520L, 520R) and the first region of the side 526L, 526R of the other feather member (either of the feather members 520L, 520R), the game balls can be biased in different directions, allowing them to enter the second winning hole 140 smoothly.

Next, as shown in Figures 26(a) and 26(b), when a game ball is sent to one of the left and right wing members 520L, 520R, the game ball is brought into contact with the bulge portion 524L or bulge portion 524R of the other left and right wing member 520L, 520R, thereby preventing the game ball from rolling along the side surface 526L, 526R of the other left and right wing member 520L, 520R and falling from its tip.

To explain in more detail, as described above, bulge 524L of left wing member 520L is formed and connected to the end face on the front side. Therefore, a game ball rolling on side surface 526L of left wing member 520L rolls on side surface 526L while contacting bulge 524L, and is thereby caused to roll toward the rear side. This allows a game ball rolling on side surface 526L of left wing member 520L to be brought closer to bulge 524R formed on right wing member 520R.

In other words, the bulges 524L, 524R formed on the left and right wing members 520L, 520R are formed at different positions in the front-to-rear direction, so that a game ball rolling toward the second winning opening on either the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R can be rolled (moved closer) to a position that matches in the front-to-rear direction with the bulge 524L, 524R formed on the other of the left wing member 520L or the right wing member 520R.

Therefore, when a game ball rolls on the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be rolled (pulled closer) to the rear side, so that it is positioned approximately in line with the bulging portion 524R of the right wing member 520R in the front-to-rear direction. On the other hand, when a game ball rolls on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be rolled (pulled closer) to the front side, so that it is positioned approximately in line with the bulging portion 524L of the left wing member 520L in the front-to-rear direction.

This prevents the game ball from riding up onto the side 526L, 526R of the other left wing member 520L or right wing member 520R when the game ball is rolling fast on either side 526L or 526R.

Here, in the conventional winning slot unit 500, the sides 526L, 526R of the first electric device 520 are formed as smooth surfaces, so there was a problem in that a game ball sent from one of the first electric devices 520 would ride up onto the other wing member 520L, 520R and be sent from the tip of the other wing member 520L, 520R into the flow-down area.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first electric role 520 has bulges 524L, 524R formed at different positions in the front-rear direction, so that the game ball rolling from one feather member can be rolled to a position that is approximately aligned with the bulges 524L, 524R formed on the other feather member in the front-rear direction. Therefore, by colliding the game ball rolling on one feather member 520L, 520R with the bulges 524L, 524R of the other feather member 520L, 520R, the game ball can be prevented from riding up onto the side surface 526L, 526R of the other feather member 520L, 520R and being sent from the tip of the feather member 520L, 520R to the play area.

Next, the recessed portion 525L and the engagement portion 511b2 will be described with reference to Figures 27 and 28. Figure 27(a) is a top view of the winning port unit 500, and Figure 27(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 500 taken along line XXVIIb-XXVIIb in Figure 27(a). Figures 28(a) and 28(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500 in range XXVIII in Figure 27(b). Note that Figure 28(a) illustrates the first electric device 520 in the first state, and Figure 28(b) illustrates the first electric device 520 in the second state.

As shown in Figures 27 and 28, the engagement portion 511b2 formed on the second protrusion 511b of the front base 511 is disposed inside the recessed portions 525L and 525R of the left and right wing members 520L and 520R, respectively.

In the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 abuts against the end of the recessed portion 525L, 525R on the bulging portion 524L, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) side (see FIG. 28(a)), and in the second state, the engaging portion 511b2 abuts against the end of the recessed portion 525L, 525R on the opposite side to the bulging portion 524L, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R).

In other words, when the first electric device 520 is displaced from the first state to the second state or from the second state to the first state, the engaging portion 511b2 abuts against the ends of the recessed portions 525L and 525R, thereby regulating the amount of displacement.

Furthermore, in the first state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L, 521R is caused by its own weight to rotate the corners of the feather members 520L, 520R farther from the through holes 521L, 521R toward the second winning opening 140. Therefore, by abutting the engagement portion 511b2 with the end portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R on the bulge portions 524L, 524R (side surfaces 526L, 526R) side, the feather members 520L, 520R can be prevented from rotating under their own weight, and the feather members 520L, 520R can be held in the first state.

In addition, in the first state, the ends of the recesses 525L, 525R on the bulge 524L, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) abut against the engagement portion 511b2, so that the side surfaces of the bulges 524L, 524R of the feather members 520L, 520R can be abutted against the engagement portion 511b2. Therefore, the rigidity of the abutment portion can be increased by the amount of the bulges 524L, 524R formed, so that the feather members 520L, 520R can be prevented from being damaged by abutting against the engagement portion 511b2.

That is, in this embodiment, a base member 510 is provided which rotatably supports the feather members 520L, 520R, and the base member 510 is provided with an engagement portion 511b2 which abuts against the feather members 520L, 520R to regulate the rotation of the feather members 520L, 520R, and since the bulge portions 524L, 524R of the feather members 520L, 520R abut against the engagement portion 511b2 of the base member 510, damage to the feather members 520L, 520R can be suppressed. That is, because the bulges 524L, 524R are portions that protrude from the wing members 520L, 520R (side surfaces 526L, 526R), the relatively rigid portions of the wing members 520L, 520R can be used as stoppers that abut against the engagement portion 511b2 of the base member 510, thereby reducing damage to the wing members 520L, 520R.

Furthermore, the bulge portions 524L, 524R have their sides formed substantially flush with the side surfaces of the base ends of the feather members 520L, 520R, and in the closed state, the sides of the bulge portions 524L, 524R formed substantially flush with the side surfaces of the base ends of the feather members 520L, 520R abut at least against the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510. This allows the parts (side surfaces of the bulge portions 524L, 524R) that are farther away from the rotation axis (through holes 521L, 521R) to abut against the engaging portion 511b2 of the base member 510, thereby reducing the reaction force input from the engaging portion 511b2 to the feather members 520L, 520R. This prevents damage to the feather members 520L, 520R. Also, for example, compared to a case where the protruding tip surfaces of the bulges 524L, 524R are in contact with the engagement portion 511b2 of the base member 510, the engagement portion 511b2 of the base member 510 can be spaced away from the second winning opening 140, and space can be secured as a flow path to the second winning opening 140. Note that in addition to the side surfaces of the bulges 524L, 524R, the base end side surfaces of the feather members 520L, 520R may also be in contact with the engagement portion 511b2 of the base member 510. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced, and damage to the feather members 520L, 520R can be further suppressed.

When the wing members 520L, 520R are closed, the bulges 524L, 524R are positioned below (below in FIG. 28(a)) the erected portion 511b1 formed on the front base 511. In other words, the erected portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposing bulges 524L, 524R.

The pair of wing members 520L, 520R are positioned so that the distance between the sides 526L, 526R in the closed state is greater than the diameter of the game ball so as not to pinch the game ball. In this case, if the bulges 524L, 524R are protruded from the sides 526L, 526R, it becomes necessary to space the pair of wing members 520L, 520R apart by the protruding height of the bulges 524L, 524R so as not to pinch the game ball between the bulges 524L, 524R, and the space required for arranging the pair of wing members 520L, 520R increases.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a standing portion 511b1 is provided that is located between the opposing bulges 524L, 524R in the closed state, and the pair of feather members 520L, 520R has a larger distance between the opposing sides 526L, 526R in the area where the bulges 524L, 524R are not formed when viewed in the rotation axis direction than the diameter of the game ball, and the opposing distance between the bulges 524L, 524R is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, so that the space required for arranging the pair of feather members 520L, 520R can be reduced.

That is, even if the pair of wing members 520L, 520R start to close (start to transition to a closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolled) along the side surfaces 526L, 526R, the standing portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposing bulging portions 524L, 524R, and the game ball is discharged from between the opposing bulging portions 524L, 524R, preventing the game ball from being pinched between the bulging portions 524L, 524R. The game ball discharged from between the opposing bulging portions 524L, 524R by the standing portion 511b1 is positioned between the opposing side surfaces 526L, 526R in the area where the bulging portions 524L, 524R are not formed, and the opposing distance at this position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, so the game ball is not pinched (see FIG. 27(a)). As a result, the distance between the bulges 524L, 524R can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This reduces the space required to arrange the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. In other words, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required to arrange a conventional product that does not have bulges 524L, 524R protruding from the side surfaces 526L, 526R.

On the other hand, in the second state, the rotational force acting around the axis of the through holes 521L, 521R is in a direction that rotates the corners of the feather members 520L, 520R farther from the through holes 521L, 521R downward in the direction of gravity due to their own weight. Therefore, by abutting the engagement portion 511b2 with the end portion opposite the bulge portion 524L, 524R (side surface 526L, 526R) of the recessed portion 525L, 525R, the feather members 520L, 520R can be prevented from rotating due to their own weight, and the feather members 520L, 520R can be held in the second state.

As a result, the displacement of the blade members 520L, 520R can be restricted at locations other than the drive unit 533d and the protrusions 523L, 523R described above, and damage to the drive unit 533d and the protrusions 523L, 523R can be suppressed. As a result, the rotating member 533 can be made smaller because there is no need to make the parts larger in order to increase the rigidity of the rotating member 533. As a result, the driving unit 530 can be made smaller.

In addition, in the open state, the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower ends of the sides 526L, 526R and higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the second winning opening 140, so that the game ball guided to the sides 526L, 526R can be sent to the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1, and can be caused to enter the second winning opening 140 by rolling along the upper surface of the standing portion 511b1 (see FIG. 28(b)).

Furthermore, as described above, a base member 511f equipped with an LED that irradiates light toward the feather members 520L, 520R (the second winning opening 140 side) is disposed on the second protrusion 511b. As shown in FIG. 28(a), in the first state, the recessed portions 525L, 525R are positioned on the lower side in the direction of gravity. This makes it easier for the light irradiated from the LED of the base member 511f to enter the inside of the feather members 520L, 520R.

That is, by irradiating the recessed portions of the recesses 525L, 525R with LED light, it is possible to suppress the LED light from being reflected by the outer surfaces of the feather members 520L, 520R. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for light to enter the interior of the feather members 520L, 520R. This makes it possible to increase the amount of light emitted from the interior of the feather members 520L, 520R toward the player. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the feather members 520L, 520R even through the front base 511, which is made of a transparent material.

When the vane members 520L, 520R are in the second state shown in FIG. 28(b), the recessed portions 525L, 525R are in substantially the same position in the up-down direction of the through holes 521L, 521R. This makes it easier for the LED of the base member 511f to illuminate the game ball sent to the front side of the second winning opening 140.

In other words, by positioning the recessed portions of the recessed portions 525L, 525R at approximately the same position in the vertical direction of the through holes 521L, 521R, the gap between the opposing first electric devices 520 can be increased. This makes it easier to illuminate the game ball sent to the front side of the second winning opening with the LED of the base member 511f. As a result, the player can easily see the game ball entering the second winning opening 140, even through the front base 511, which is made of a transparent material.

Next, the manner in which the winning port unit 500 is arranged on the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in range XXIX of FIG. 2.

As shown in FIG. 29, the prize slot unit 500 is disposed at a predetermined gap from the inner edge of the inner rail 76.

A first outlet 71 is formed on the inside of the lower end of the inner rail 76 to collect game balls that flow down the conventional game area. Therefore, the lower end of the inner rail 76 is formed with a curved portion 76a that is curved with a curvature larger than the curvature of the entire inner rail 76 to make it easier for game balls to collect.

Therefore, the gap between the winning slot unit 500 and the inner rail 76 is made larger at the lower end of the inner reel (where the curved portion 76a is formed). As described above, the front base 511 and rear base 512 of the winning slot unit 500 are fastened together by inserting a screwdriver or the like obliquely into the recessed portion 511b3 from below the front base 511.

The through hole 511b4 is formed in the second protrusion 511b, which is formed at approximately the center of the front base 511 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the through hole 511b4 can be positioned above the curved portion 76a (above in Figure 29). Therefore, when inserting a screwdriver or the like diagonally from below the front base 511 into the recessed portion 511b3, the gap formed by the curved portion 76a with the winning port unit 500 can be used, making it easier to attach and detach the front base 511 from the rear base 512 from the front side of the game board 13.

In addition, the inner rail 76 makes it difficult for the player to see inside the recessed portion 511b3, so that the player's interest is prevented from decreasing when the player sees the screws that fasten the front base 511 and the rear base 512.

Next, the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to Figures 30 to 36.

First, the configuration of the decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to Figures 30 to 33. Figure 30(a) is a front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and Figure 30(b) is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along line XXXb-XXXb in Figure 30(a). Figure 31 is an exploded perspective front view of the decorative pattern display device 800, and Figure 32 is an exploded perspective rear view of the decorative pattern display device 800. Figure 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 unfolded, and Figure 33(b) is a front view of the outer reel 821 unfolded.

As shown in Figures 30 to 33, the decorative pattern display device 800 is mainly comprised of an inner reel unit 810 that is configured to be rotatable, an outer reel unit 820 that houses a part of the inner reel unit 810, a storage unit 880 that houses the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 inside, a drive motor KM1 attached to the storage unit 880 and driving the inner reel unit 810 to rotate, a drive motor KM2 attached to the storage unit 880 and driving the outer reel unit 820 to rotate, and a backlight unit 830 disposed inside the inner reel unit 810.

The inner reel unit 810 is formed with an approximately cylindrical inner reel 811 that penetrates from left to right, a rotating member 812 that is disposed on one end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (left side of Figure 30(a)), and a circular member 813 that is disposed on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (right side of Figure 30(a)).

The inner reel 811 is formed by winding a strip-shaped sheet made of transparent resin in the circumferential direction. As shown in FIG. 33(a), the inner reel 811 has decorative patterns arranged at equal intervals with the longitudinal direction oriented vertically. Note that the arrangement of the decorative patterns on each of the inner reels 811 of the three decorative pattern display devices 800 arranged side by side is different.

The rotating member 812 is mainly composed of a hub 812a formed in a roughly disk shape, a rim 812b formed in a roughly annular shape with a larger diameter than the hub 812a, and spokes 812c connecting the outer circumferential surface of the hub 812a and the inner circumferential surface of the rim 812b.

The hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed so that their axes are aligned in the same straight line, and are positioned at different positions in the axial direction. Therefore, the spokes 812c are formed so that they are inclined in the axial direction toward the radially outer side of the hub 812a.

The rim 812b is the portion to which one end of the inner reel 811 is attached on its outer circumferential surface, and is formed with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the inner reel 811. In other words, the circumferential distance dimension of the outer circumferential portion of the rim 812b is set to be approximately the same as the longitudinal dimension of the unfolded inner reel 811. Therefore, the inner reel 811 can be disposed (attached) without any gaps on the outer circumferential surface of the rim 812b.

The hub 812a is disposed inside the inner reel 811. That is, the spokes 812c connecting the hub 812a and the rim 812b are formed to be inclined toward the other end (the annular member 813 described later) of the opening of the inner reel 811 as they move radially inward. This allows the hub 812a to be disposed inside the inner reel 811. The spokes 812c are formed from a plurality of rod-shaped bodies extending from the rim 812b to the hub 812a, and have inner openings 812c1 that open between the spokes 812c adjacent in the circumferential direction.

The hub 812a is positioned in the axial direction at approximately the same position as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction. This allows more space to be secured on the annular member 813 side than the hub 812a. A drive motor KM1 is connected to the hub 812a, which provides a rotational driving force to the inner reel unit 810.

The thickness dimension of the drive motor KM1 in the axial direction of the inner reel 811 is approximately half the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. As described above, the axial position of the hub 812a is approximately the same as the center position of the inner reel 811 in the left-right direction, and space is formed in the inner part of the other end (annular member 813) side of the opening of the inner reel 811, so most of the drive motor KM1 can be arranged inside the inner reel 811. As a result, the dimensions of the inner reel unit 810 and the drive motor KM1 in the left-right direction (axial direction of the inner reel 811) can be reduced.

The drive motor KM1 has a rotating shaft arranged in a straight line coaxial with the shaft of the hub 812a. That is, the shaft of the hub 812a is connected to the rotating shaft of the drive motor KM1. As described above, the shaft of the hub 812a and the shaft of the rim 812b are arranged on the same straight line, so that the rotation of the drive motor KM1 can rotate the inner reel 811 around the shaft of the inner reel 811. This allows the player to visually recognize the patterns decorated on the inner reel 811 as displacing in the vertical direction.

The ring member 813 is formed in a ring shape with an outer diameter that is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the rim 812b. The inner peripheral surface of the ring member 813 on the other end side of the opening of the inner reel 811 (right side in Figure 30 (a)) is attached to its outer peripheral surface.

As mentioned above, the inner reel 811 is made of a transparent resin sheet, and has a relatively low rigidity. Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated and displaced, it may be deformed by the centrifugal force of the rotation or wind pressure, and the player may not be able to accurately recognize the patterns decorated around it.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inner reel 811 is connected to the rim 812b of the rotating member 812 at one end and to the circular member 813 at the other end, so that it is less likely to be displaced by centrifugal force or wind pressure when the inner reel unit 810 rotates. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 rotates and displaces, the player can accurately recognize the patterns decorated around the inner reel 811.

In addition, because the inner reel 811 can be formed from a sheet, the load of the inner reel 811 can be reduced accordingly. This reduces the load on the drive motor KM1 when driving the inner reel unit 810 to rotate. As a result, the inner reel unit 810 can start rotating smoothly.

The outer reel unit 820 is mainly composed of an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape, a hub 823 formed in a disk shape with a smaller diameter than the outer reel 821, and spokes 822 that connect the inner peripheral surface of one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left side of Figure 30 (a)) and the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

The outer reel 821 is formed so that its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the inner reel 811, and its width dimension in the axial direction is larger than the axial dimension of the inner reel 811. The inner reel 811 is formed from a transparent resin material and has a predetermined thickness in the radial direction. The outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 is decorated with a pattern, and the manner of the decoration will be described later.

The hub 823 is arranged so that its axis is coaxial with the outer reel 821 and is located approximately in the axial center of the outer reel 821. In addition, the drive motor KM2 that provides a rotational driving force to the outer reel unit 820 is connected to the hub 823.

The spokes 822 are formed at an angle in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 toward the radially outer side of the hub 823, which allows a space to be formed between the spokes 822 and one end side of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left side of FIG. 30(a)). In addition, the spokes 822 are formed from multiple rod-shaped bodies extending from the hub 823 to the edge portion 824, and have openings 822a that open between adjacent spokes 822 in the circumferential direction.

The thickness dimension of the drive motor KM2 in the axial direction of the outer reel 821 is approximately half the axial dimension of the outer reel 821. As described above, the hub 823 is positioned in the axial direction at approximately the same position as the center of the outer reel 821 in the left-right direction, and a space is formed on one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 (left in the left-right direction in Figure 30 (a)), so most of the drive motor KM2 can be disposed inside the outer reel 821. As a result, the dimensions of the outer reel unit 820 and the drive motor KM2 in the left-right direction (axial direction of the outer reel 821) can be reduced.

The storage unit 880 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, and can store the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 inside. The storage unit 880 is mainly formed with a pair of left and right side wall portions 881, an upper wall portion 882, a lower wall portion 883, and a rear wall portion 884 arranged on the edge between the pair of opposing side wall portions 881.

The side wall portion 881 is formed from a plate-like body that is generally rectangular in side view, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 30(a)) and smaller than the outer diameter of the outer drum in the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(b)).

A drive motor KM2 that drives the outer reel unit 820 is disposed on the right surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the left side as viewed from the front (left side of Figure 30(a)), and a drive motor KM1 that drives the inner reel unit 810 is disposed on the left surface (inner surface) of the side wall portion 881 on the right side as viewed from the front (right side of Figure 30(a)). That is, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 are rotationally displaced relative to the side wall portion 881.

The side wall 881 also has a curved bulge 881a on the front side that bulges outward to match the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811. This prevents light emitted from the backlight unit 830 (described later) from escaping from the left and right outer sides of the inner reel 811.

The side wall portion 881 is also formed from a metal material. This increases the rigidity of the storage unit 880. Also, by being formed from a metal material that generally has higher thermal conductivity than a resin material, heat generated inside the storage unit 880 can be discharged to the outside of the storage unit 880. As a result, parts can be prevented from breaking due to heat accumulating inside the storage unit 880.

The upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are plate members that form the upper and lower side surfaces of the storage unit 880, and are disposed along the edge of the upper portion (upper portion in FIG. 30(b)) and the edge of the lower portion (lower portion in FIG. 30(b)), respectively, of the side wall portion 881.

The width dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) of the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion is formed to be smaller than the width dimension in the left-right direction (axial direction) of the outer reel 821. This ensures a sufficient distance between the opposing side wall portions 881, and allows the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 to be positioned in that space.

In addition, the upper wall portion 882 and the lower wall portion 883 are formed with a plurality of through holes that penetrate radially relative to the axis of the outer reel 821. This increases the air flow between the inside and outside of the storage unit 880. As a result, heat is prevented from building up inside the storage unit 880, and parts are prevented from being damaged by the heat of the storage unit 880.

The rear wall portion 884 is a plate member that forms the side surface on the rear side of the storage unit 880, and is disposed along the edge on the rear side (right side in FIG. 30(b)) of the side wall portion 881.

The rear wall 884 has an opening 884a formed therethrough in the front-to-rear direction at a position where it intersects with the axis of the outer reel 821 in the horizontal direction (left-to-right direction in FIG. 30(b)), and is formed with erected portions 884b that are bent toward the front side and erected at both left and right ends where the opening 884a is formed.

The opening 884a is formed so that its width in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 30(a)) is greater than the width in the axial direction of the outer reel 821. This prevents the outer reel 821 from colliding with the rear wall 884 when it moves (sways) in the forward-backward direction due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, etc.

In other words, when the outer reel 821 moves (sways) forward and backward due to the inertial force of the rotational motion, vibration, etc., a part of the rear side of the outer reel 821 (the right side in FIG. 30(b)) can be inserted inside the opening 884a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer reel 821 from colliding with the rear wall portion 884.

In addition, the opening 884a can increase the air flow between the inside and outside of the storage unit 880. As a result, heat can be prevented from remaining inside the storage unit 880, and parts can be prevented from being damaged by the heat of the storage unit 880.

If an opening 884a is formed in the rear wall 884 that is larger than the axial width of the outer reel 821, the rigidity of the rear wall 884 on both sides of the opening 884a will be reduced. This could lead to bending of the rear wall 884.

In this case, it is also possible to increase the rigidity of the rear wall portions 884 on both sides of the opening 884a by increasing the distance between the side wall portions 881, but there is a problem in that increasing the distance between the side wall portions 881 would increase the size of the decorative pattern display device 800 unit itself.

In contrast, in this embodiment, standing portions 884b are formed on both the left and right sides of the rear wall portion 884 at the position where the opening 884a is formed. This increases the rigidity of the rear wall portion 884. As a result, bending of the rear wall portion 884 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rear wall portion 884 is formed from a metal material, and the distance dimension from the left and right ends of the opening 884a to the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 is made sufficiently small. Therefore, the deformation rate of the plastic deformation when forming the left and right ends of the rear wall portion 884 can be increased. As a result, the rigidity can be increased.

The backlight unit 830 is a unit that emits light from inside the inner reel 811 to make it easier for the player to recognize the patterns on the inner reel 811, and is positioned on the inside front of the inner reel 811.

The backlight unit 830 is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the side, and the axis of the arc is arranged coaxially with the axis of the inner reel 811. In addition, the width dimension in the axial direction of the backlight unit 830 is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the axial direction of the inner reel 811.

The circumferential length dimension L4 of the backlight unit 830 on the inner reel 811 side is formed to be the length of three of the patterns that decorate the inner reel 811, which will be described later.

The backlight unit 830 further has three recesses 831 arranged side by side in the circumferential direction, recessed radially inward on the outer circumferential surface. Therefore, between each recess 831, a partition plate 832 is formed, which stands radially outward of the backlight unit 830.

A base member 833 equipped with an LED that emits light is disposed on the radially inner side of each recess 831, and the LED can emit light toward the radially outer side of the backlight unit 830.

Each base member 833 can be supplied with power independently, allowing the inner reel 811 to partially emit light. In this case, since each base member 833 is disposed in an area surrounded on all four sides (recess 831), it is possible to prevent light emitted from the LED of the base member 833 from entering the front area of the other base members 833. This makes it easier to partially emit light to the inner reel 811.

Next, referring to Figure 33, the symbols that decorate the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 will be described. Figure 33(a) is a front view of the inner reel 811 unfolded, and Figure 33(b) is a front view of the outer reel 821 unfolded.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), multiple symbols are drawn at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (vertical direction in FIG. 33) on the inner reel 811. As described above, the circumferential dimension L5 of one symbol is set to one-third the circumferential length dimension L4 of the backlight unit 830 (L5 x 3 = L4).

The inner reel 811 is also generally made of a material that can transmit light. In particular, the pattern portion (for example, the "7" mark) has a higher light transmittance than the surrounding blank portion. Therefore, by irradiating light from the LEDs of the backlight unit 830 arranged inside the inner reel 811, the LED light can penetrate the inner reel 811 and make the pattern portion stand out. Therefore, if the LEDs of the backlight unit 830 are kept in an emitting state, the player can see the pattern on the inner reel 811 even if the inner reel 811 is not irradiated with external light (light inside the store or light from other LEDs arranged in the pachinko machine 10).

In this embodiment, 10 symbols of five different types are drawn consecutively in the circumferential direction, and the segment display device 600, described below, allows the player to see up to three symbols. As described above, each decorative symbol display device 800 is decorated with a different arrangement of symbols, allowing the player to see up to nine symbols.

The pachinko machine 10 also displays 3x3 symbols on the inner reel 811, setting up a total of five winning lines for the jackpot: three parallel lines horizontally and two cross-hatched lines diagonally. By stopping the inner reel 811 so that three "7" symbols line up on any of the winning lines, the player can be informed that a jackpot has occurred.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the outer reel 821 has a non-decorative surface 821a that is not decorated, and a non-transparent surface 821b that is decorated to block light.

The non-decorative surface 821a is not decorated and is therefore light-transmitting. That is, the outer reel 821 is formed from a transparent material (in this embodiment, a transparent resin material) to form the non-decorative surface 821a that is light-transmitting. Note that the non-decorative surface 821a only needs to be formed to be light-transmitting, and may be, for example, decorated with a translucent decoration that allows light to pass through.

The decorative pattern display device 800 allows the player to see the pattern on the inner reel 811 arranged inside the outer reel 821 by rotating the outer reel unit 820 and facing the non-decorative surface 821a toward the player. In other words, the player can see the pattern on the inner reel 811 through the non-decorative surface 821a of the outer reel 821.

The non-transparent surface 821b is made opaque to light by applying black decoration to the outer peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 (the front side of the page in FIG. 33(b)). In addition, the length of the non-transparent surface 821b in the circumferential direction (the length in the vertical direction in FIG. 33(b)) is formed to be equal to or greater than three of the patterns decorated on the inner reel 811.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to display three symbols on the inner reel 811 on the player side. Therefore, by making the circumferential length of the non-transparent surface 821b equal to or greater than three symbols decorated on the inner reel 811, the inner reel 811 can be made invisible to the player by rotating the outer reel unit 820 and positioning the non-transparent surface of the outer reel 821 on the player side.

The circumferential length of the non-transparent surface 821b is not limited to three or more symbols that decorate the inner reel 811, as long as the circumferential length is such that the decoration of the inner reel 811 is not visible to the player. In other words, the non-transparent surface 821b is formed to the circumferential length of the inner reel 811 that is visible to the player.

In addition, the non-transparent surface 821b has a transparent area 821b1 that is partially light-transmitting, and a pattern 821b2 that is decorated with a design.

The transparent area 821b1 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the left-right direction (left-right direction in Figure 33) when viewed from the front. The transparent area 821b1 is a part that creates a seven-segment display when combined with the segment display device 600 described below, and can partially transmit light that passes through the inner reel 811 to the player side. This allows it to form part of the seven-segment display described below.

The pattern 821b2 is formed with a circumferential length equivalent to three of the patterns decorating the inner reel 811, and by stopping the outer reel 821 so that each pattern 821b2 of each decorative pattern display device 800 is aligned in three parallel rows horizontally, the player can be informed that a jackpot has occurred.

As described above, the periphery of the pattern 821b2 is opaque, so the player cannot see the inner reel 811. This allows the pattern on the inner reel 811 to stop on the winning line while displaying three matching patterns of the pattern 821b2. Therefore, the player can be made to focus on the outer reel 821 by the rotation display of the outer reel 821, and then, almost at the same time as the display of the outer reel 821 ends, the player can be made to focus on the inner reel 811. This prevents the player's interest from being lost.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will be described with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 taken along line XXXIV-XXXIV in Figure 30(a). Figure 35 is a partially enlarged view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in range XXXV in Figure 34. Figure 36(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 812, and Figure 36(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 812 taken along line XXXVIb-XXXVIb in Figure 36(a).

As shown in Figures 34 to 36, a predetermined gap is formed between the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820. In addition, a predetermined gap is formed between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge portion 824 that protrudes radially from one end of the opening of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 (left side of Figure 34).

The hub 812a of the rotating member 812 is formed with protrusions 812a1 that protrude toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals around the circumference of the hub 812a (in this embodiment, they are formed on the extensions of the spokes 812c (see FIG. 36)). The protrusions 812a1 are formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined around the circumference of the hub 812a. Therefore, by rotating the inner reel unit 810, the protrusions 812a1 can generate wind.

Here, conventionally, gaming machines have been known that have a first reel (outer reel unit 820) that is rotatably formed, and a second reel (inner reel unit 810) that is arranged approximately concentrically inside the first reel (outer reel unit 820) and is rotatably formed (i.e., have a dual reel structure). Also known is a technology that removes dust from the display surface of the reel by contacting a rotating brush with the outer periphery (display surface) of the reel and moving the rotating member in response to the rotation of the reel.

However, the dual reel structure has the problem that cleaning is difficult. That is, with a dual reel structure, there is no space between the outer reel (first reel (outer reel unit 820)) and the inner reel (second reel (inner reel unit 810)) to place the rotating brush described above, so it is not possible to clean the inner surface of the outer reel or the outer surface of the inner reel (second reel).

In other words, the gap between the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is narrow, so in order to remove dust (dirt) that has entered and stuck in that gap, it is necessary to disassemble the decorative pattern display device 800, making cleaning difficult.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protrusions 812a1 can push out air and generate wind when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, and flows into the gap between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In this case, the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 is made narrower than the space on the inner circumferential side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a, so air can flow from the space on the inner circumferential side of the edge 824 and the hub 812a into the space between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. This makes it possible to blow away dust (dirt) that is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, or dust that is about to attach to it. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from attaching to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in this embodiment, the outer reel unit 820 includes an outer reel 821 formed in a cylindrical shape and an edge portion 824 extending radially inward from one axial side of the outer reel 821, and the inner reel unit 810 includes an inner reel 811 formed in a cylindrical shape and having an outer surface facing the inner surface of the outer reel 821 at a predetermined distance, and a hub 812a extending radially inward from one axial side of the inner reel 811 and having an outer surface facing the inner surface of the edge portion 824 at a predetermined distance, and a protrusion 812a1 is erected from the outer surface of the hub 812a toward the inner surface of the edge portion 824, so that the protrusion 812a1 is displaced circumferentially between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure, and this wind pressure can be used to move air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. This allows the air flow to remove dust and clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the second outer periphery.

If an opening is formed in at least one of the edge 824 or the hub 812a, or if a portion of the circumference is partially disconnected, the wind pressure generated by the projection 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a will escape through the opening or disconnected portion, weakening the wind pressure and making it more difficult for air to flow between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the edge portion 824 and the hub 812a are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a surface that is continuous in the circumferential direction, so the wind pressure generated by the projection 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be increased. This makes it easier to move air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811. As a result, the wind pressure generated by the projection 812a1 being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be used to make it easier to move air between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811.

In addition, the protrusion 812a1 narrows the gap between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 in the circumferential direction of the inner reel 811. Therefore, the protrusion 812a1 makes it easier to change the atmospheric pressure between the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. This makes it easier to generate wind by utilizing the change in atmospheric pressure, and the wind can be made to flow into the gap between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, blowing away dust (dirt) that is stuck to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 or dust that is about to stick to it. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

To explain in more detail, air has the tendency to flow from high pressure to low pressure, and by narrowing the gap between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820, the air pressure can be increased partially. Therefore, the air pressure in the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, where air pressure changes are less likely to occur, is made lower than the air pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. As a result, air can be easily sent to the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, and dust can be prevented from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Furthermore, since the atmospheric pressure between the protruding tip of the protrusion 812a1 and the edge portion 824 can be increased, it is possible to prevent the protrusion 812a1 from being displaced (wobbled) toward the edge portion 824 or the edge portion 824 from being displaced toward the protrusion 812a1.

In addition, the spokes 822 supporting the edge 824 and the spokes 812c supporting the hub 812a are formed with outer openings 825 and inner openings 812c1, so that the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be exhausted to the outside through the outer openings 825 and inner openings 812c1 (or air can be sucked in from the outside between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a). That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a can be made to flow (out or in). As a result, the air can be made to flow easily between the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the vertical portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a.

Furthermore, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a (crotch edge 824) of the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820), and at least the outer opening 825 (or the inner opening 812c1) is formed on the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) of the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810), so that the effect of reducing flow resistance by taking in (or exhausting) air through the outer opening 825 can be easily achieved. That is, when rotating one of the outer reel unit 820 and the inner reel unit 810 on which the protrusion 812a1 is erected, the other on which the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 is opened and formed is stopped, so that the resistance of the air flow (exhaust or intake) through the outer opening 825 or the inner opening 812c1 can be reduced.

The outer reel 821 is formed with a slight radial outward inclination (widening) from the edge 824 (one end) to which the spokes 822 are connected toward the other end. This makes it easier to send air that flows in from one end between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 to the other end. As a result, it is possible to prevent the air flow between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 from being stopped, and it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

Furthermore, the inclination angle θ1 of spoke 812c radially outward from the axis of inner reel 811 is set to be greater than the inclination angle θ2 of spoke 822 radially outward from the axis of outer reel 821 (θ1>θ2). Therefore, when spoke 812c and spoke 822 are rotationally displaced to a position (for example, the position shown in FIG. 34) where they overlap in the axial direction (left-right direction in FIG. 34), the dimension between them increases radially outward (up-down direction in FIG. 34).

Therefore, by rotating and displacing either or both of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, the difference in distance between the opposing spokes 812c and 822 makes it easier to generate wind flowing in the direction between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

To explain in more detail, the distance between the opposing spokes 812c and 822 is increased toward the radially outer side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. Therefore, when the spokes 812c and 822 are rotated to a position where they overlap in the axial direction, the atmospheric pressure is higher between the opposing spokes 812c and 822 on the radially inner side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821.

As mentioned above, air has the tendency to flow from high pressure to low pressure. Therefore, it is possible to form an air flow from the radially inner part toward the radially outer part. That is, it is possible to form an air flow from the axial side of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821 toward the opposing space between the hub 812a and the edge portion 824. Therefore, it is possible to easily send air into the space between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from adhering to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to be light-transmitting, and multiple symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, so that the player can visually see the change in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 through the outer reel unit 820. In this case, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more times than the outer reel unit 820, so that the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased in the performance by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810. In other words, cleaning can be made easier in the double reel structure.

The timing for cleaning the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 by rotating the inner reel unit 810 is preferably when there is no operation by the player (no game balls are shot into the game area) and the pachinko machine 10 is in a standby state. In this case, the inner reel unit 810 is rotated at high speed to generate wind, so that the changing of the patterns on the inner reel 811 can attract the interest of the player.

The outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 may be cleaned while the non-transparent surface 821b of the outer reel 821 is being rotated toward the player. In this case, the inner reel 811 is invisible to the player, so cleaning can be performed without the player being able to see the cleaning state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. In addition, since cleaning can be performed during a game state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 can be cleaned even if the game is being played continuously for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent dust and other debris from accumulating on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821 during play.

Next, the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to Figs. 37 to 63. First, the configuration of the segment display device 600 will be described with reference to Figs. 37 and 38. Fig. 37 is a front view of the segment display device 600, and Fig. 38 is an exploded view of the segment display device 600.

As shown in Figures 37 and 38, the segment display device 600 is formed by arranging a vertical displacement unit 600L on the left side as viewed from the front, a vertical displacement unit 600R on the right side as viewed from the front, and a vertical displacement unit 600C between the left and right vertical displacement units 600L and 600R in parallel in the horizontal direction, and fastening and fixing a connecting member 601 from the rear side.

Because the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R have almost the same configuration, the following will only describe the vertical displacement unit 600L that is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front, and will omit a detailed description of the vertical displacement units 600C and 600R.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to Figures 39 to 41. Figure 39(a) is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and Figure 39(b) is a side view of the vertical displacement unit 600C. Figure 40 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and Figure 41 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

Note that Figures 40 and 41 show the first segment unit 610, the second segment unit 620, and the displacement unit 650 in disassembled form.

As shown in Figures 39 to 41, the vertical displacement unit 600L is provided with a displacement unit 650 that is configured to be displaceable, and a first segment unit 610 and a second segment unit 620 that are arranged on the left and right of the displacement unit 650.

The first segment unit 610 is a unit capable of displaying one segment in the left-right direction, and the second segment unit 620 is a unit capable of displaying two segments in the left-right direction. Also, since the first segment unit 610 is formed by simply halving the second segment unit 620 in the left-right direction, only the second segment unit 620 will be described below, and the symbols in the configuration of the second segment unit 620 will be similarly assigned to the first segment unit 610.

Each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R has a different arrangement of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620. The vertical displacement unit 610C has the second segment unit 620 arranged only on the right side when viewed from the front, and the vertical displacement unit 610R has the second segment unit 620 arranged on the right side when viewed from the front.

Therefore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment on the left side when viewed from the front, and two segments on the right side when viewed from the front. The vertical displacement unit 600C can display two segments only on the right side when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the vertical displacement unit 600L can display one segment only on the right side when viewed from the front. In other words, it is possible to form one segment on both the left and right sides of each of the vertical displacement units 600L, 600C, and 600R.

Next, the second segment unit 620 will be described with reference to Figures 42 to 44. Figure 42(a) is a front view of the second segment unit 620, and Figure 42(b) is a rear view of the second segment unit 620. Figure 43 is an exploded perspective front view of the second segment unit 620, and Figure 44 is an exploded perspective rear view of the second segment unit 620.

As shown in Figures 42 to 44, the second segment unit 620 is formed mainly by a light-transmitting member 621 arranged on the front side, a partition member 622 arranged on the back side of the light-transmitting member 621, a plurality of diffusion members 623 arranged on the back side of the partition member 622, a base member 624 arranged between the plurality of diffusion members 623, and reflection members 625 arranged on both sides of the base member 624.

The light-transmitting member 621 is formed from a translucent, light-transmitting resin material that allows light to pass through the inside. The light-transmitting member 621 is mainly formed with a light-transmitting portion 621a formed in the shape of a circular arc plate that is convex on the front side, and a flat portion 621b formed above and below the light-transmitting portion 621a.

The light-transmitting portion 621a is mainly formed with erected walls 621a1 erected on the rear side from the left and right ends, fastening portions 621a2 protruding in an annular shape on the rear side from the top and bottom ends, and decorative portions 621a3 recessed into the rear side continuously in the up and down direction at the center of the left and right sides of the front side.

The erected walls 621a1 are formed by erecting from the left and right ends of the light-transmitting portion 621a on the rear side. The distance between the erected walls 621a1 is set to be approximately the same as the width dimension in the left-right direction of the partition member 622 described below. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the rear side of the light-transmitting portion 621a, the partition member 622 can be restricted from moving left and right.

The fastening portion 621a2 is a protrusion that forms a hole for fastening the reflective member 625 (described later) with a screw, and is formed in a circular ring shape protruding from the back side of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the reflective member 625 can be fastened by screwing the tip of a screw into the inner edge of the fastening portion 621a2.

As described above, the decorative portion 621a3 is recessed continuously in the vertical direction at the center of the left and right of the light-transmitting portion 621a. This prevents light that passes through the left side as viewed from the front from being reflected inside the decorative portion 621a3 and emitted from the right side as viewed from the front. A detailed explanation of the light that passes through the decorative portion 621a3 will be given later.

The flat surface portion 621b is a plate member for fastening to the base member 660 of the displacement unit 650 described below. The flat surface portion 621b is formed into a plate-like body having a shape in a front view that is substantially the same as that of the base member 660, and the displacement unit 650 and the second segment unit 620 can be fastened together by fastening a screw through the flat surface portion 621b.

The flat surface portion 621b is formed with an elastic piece 621b1 that protrudes on the opposing side. The elastic piece 621b1 protrudes from the opposing side surfaces of the flat surface portion 621b that is formed in a pair at the top and bottom, and protrudes in a curved shape that is convex toward the front side. The elastic piece 621b1 is formed in a curved shape with a smaller radius than the light transmitting portion 621a, and the protruding tip is in a state in which it abuts against the upper wall portion 882 or the lower wall portion 883 of the decorative pattern display device 800 that is disposed inside the displacement unit 650. This makes it possible to suppress vibration of the decorative pattern display device 800 when the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the decorative pattern display device 800 are rotated.

The partition member 622 is formed from a resin material that is difficult for light to transmit, and is formed in a curved plate shape in side view. The radius of the curved outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a, and the width in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 42) is set to be smaller than the width in the vertical direction of the light transmitting portion 621a. Therefore, the outer peripheral surface of the partition member 622 can be placed in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the light transmitting portion 621a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the partition member 622 is mainly formed with a first recessed portion 622a recessed toward the center from both end faces on the left and right (left and right in FIG. 42), a second recessed portion 622b recessed toward the center from both end faces on the top and bottom (top and bottom in FIG. 42), and a protruding portion 622c protruding from the center position on the left and right on the back side.

The first recesses 622a are formed in pairs on both the left and right sides, side by side in the vertical direction. In other words, the first recesses 622a are formed in four places in the partition member 622.

The second recessed portion 622b is formed by recessing both the top and bottom ends. The dimension between the opposing recessed tips of the second recessed portion 622b is set to be approximately the same as the vertical separation distance of the fastening portion 621a2 formed in the light-transmitting member 621. Therefore, when the partition member 622 is disposed on the back side of the light-transmitting member 621, the fastening portion 621a2 is inserted inside the second recessed portion 622b, thereby preventing the partition member 622 from moving in the vertical direction.

The protruding portion 622c is formed at the left-right center position of the partition member 622, extending in the up-down direction. The protruding portion 622c also has a recess 622c1 recessed into the protruding tip surface. The recess 622c1 is formed so that its width dimension in the left-right direction is greater than the thickness dimension of the base member 624 described below. Therefore, when the base member 624 is disposed on the partition member 622, the tip side of the base member 624 can be inserted inside the recess 622c1. As a result, when the base member 624 is disposed, the base member 624 can be positioned and the base member 624 can be prevented from moving in the left-right direction.

The diffusion member 623 is made of a milky white resin material and can diffuse the light that penetrates inside. The diffusion member 623 is formed in a curved plate shape when viewed from the side, and the radius of its outer periphery (front side) is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner periphery (back side) of the partition member 622. Therefore, the diffusion member 623 can be placed in a state where it is grounded to the back side of the partition member 622.

The diffusion members 623 are arranged in pairs, one above the other, and two to the left and right, spaced a predetermined distance apart. In other words, four diffusion members 623 are arranged on the rear side of the partition member 622.

The width dimension of the diffusion member 623 in the left-right direction is set to be approximately the same as the distance between the erected wall 621a1 of the light-transmitting member 621 and the protruding portion 622c of the partition member 622. This makes it possible to prevent the diffusion member 623 from moving left and right when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622.

The diffusion member 623 is formed with a protruding portion 623a that protrudes from the front side and a recessed portion 623b that is recessed on the rear side of the protruding portion 623a.

The protrusion 623a is formed to protrude at a position corresponding to the first recessed portion 622a of the partition member 622 disposed on the front side of the diffusion member 623, and is disposed in a state inserted inside the first recessed portion 622a. This makes it possible to prevent the partition member 622 from shifting in the left-right and up-down directions when the diffusion member 623 is disposed on the back side of the partition member 622.

The protruding distance of the protruding portion 623a is set to be smaller than the thickness dimension of the partition member 622. In other words, the protruding portion 623a is disposed with a predetermined gap between the protruding tip surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member 621 (see FIG. 45).

The recessed portion 623b is formed on the opposite side to the protruding portion 623a (the back side of the diffusion member 623) in a shape slightly smaller than the shape of the protruding portion 623a when viewed from the front. is formed. This allows the thickness of the plate of the diffusion member 623 to be approximately constant, and distortion when the diffusion member 623 is molded can be suppressed. In addition, the recessed portion 623b is formed in a shape slightly smaller than the protruding portion 623a, so that the area of the back side of the end of the protruding portion 623a can be increased. Therefore, the light incident on the diffusion member 623 from the LED 624a described later can be increased at the end of the protruding portion 623a. As a result, the form of light that is visually recognized by the player through the diffusion member 623 can be made clear (distinct), and the decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

The base member 624 is formed from a crescent-shaped plate with a curved front side, and is equipped with an LED 624a that irradiates light onto the side surface. The radius of the arc of the base member 624 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the recessed tip surface of the recess 622c1 formed in the partition member 622. Therefore, when the base member 624 is disposed on the back surface of the partition member 622, the base member 624 can be inserted inside the recess 622c1 of the partition member 622 to prevent the base member 624 from shifting in position in the left-right direction.

Multiple LEDs 624a are arranged on both the left and right sides of the base member 624, and the direction of illumination is perpendicular to the side of the base member 624. In other words, the direction of illumination of light from the LEDs 624a is the left-right direction. A detailed explanation of the illumination of light from the LEDs 624a will be given later.

The reflective members 625 are disposed on both the left and right sides of the base member 624. The reflective members 625 are formed from a white resin material and are formed in a convex arc shape on the front side. The radius of the arc of the reflective member 625 is set to be approximately the same as the radius of the inner circumferential surface of the diffusing member 623. This allows the reflective member 625 and the diffusing member 623 to be grounded when the reflective member 625 is disposed on the rear side of the diffusing member 623.

The reflecting member 625 is formed as a plate-like body separated from the base member 624 in the left-right direction from the rear side toward the front side, and is mainly formed with an inclined portion 625a inclined from the rear side toward the front side, a plurality of recesses 625b formed in a line in the vertical direction on the front side of the inclined portion 625a, and wall portions 625c formed at the upper end, lower end, and middle part of the recesses 625b and protruding toward the front side.

The front side of the inclined portion 625a is a reflective surface 625a1 that reflects the light of the LED 624a of the base member 624 to the front side, and is formed at an incline of approximately 60 degrees with respect to the side of the base member 624. As described above, the direction of irradiation of the light of the LED 624a is perpendicular to the side of the base member 624, so by forming the reflective surface 625a1 at an incline with respect to the side of the base member 624, the light irradiated from the LED 624a can be reflected to the front side. The manner in which the light of the LED 624a travels will be described later.

The recess 625b is formed in a convex curved shape on the back side. The recess 625b is also formed in a position corresponding to the LED 624a of the base member 624, which makes it possible to make the amount of light from the LED 624a visible to the player through the diffusion member 623 uniform. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

Next, referring to Figure 45, the progression of the light emitted from the LED 624a of the second segment unit 620 will be described in detail. Figure 45 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along line XLV-XLV in Figure 42(a). Note that in Figure 45, the form of the light emitted from the LED 624a is partially illustrated by a two-dot chain line. Also, the outline of the decorative pattern display device 800 disposed on the left and right rear sides of the second segment unit 620 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

As shown in FIG. 45, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed at an obtuse angle with respect to the side of the base member 624 (i.e., the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects with the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle), so that the light can be reflected outward. In this case, the reflective member 625 is formed from a plate member with a substantially constant thickness, so that the space on the opposite side of the reflective surface 625a1 (the rear side of the reflective member 625) can be made larger. This allows the end of the decorative pattern display device 800 to be positioned on the rear side of the second segment unit 620.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a rotating device (decorative pattern display device 800) that is rotatably formed and arranged in a row with a predetermined interval between it, a decorative member (light-transmitting member 621) that is arranged between the multiple reels and has at least a portion that is light-transmitting, and a board (base member 624) that is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and has multiple light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) mounted thereon, with the board arranged in a position where the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is approximately perpendicular to the back side of the decorative member. With this gaming machine, not only can the space between the reels be shielded from the player by the decorative member, but also a pattern can be formed (displayed) on the surface of the decorative member by the light of the light-emitting means that has passed through the decorative member, and an effect can be performed in which the pattern of the decorative member is visually recognized by the player as one with the pattern displayed on the outer periphery of the reel.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light-emitting means cannot be sufficiently irradiated onto the back surface of the decorative member, and the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means cannot be made large enough. This causes the problem of insufficient presentation effect. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, a reflecting member 625 is provided that reflects the light emitted from the LED 624a to the back surface of the light-transmitting member 621. Therefore, even if the base member 624 is arranged with the surface on which the LED 624a is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the light-transmitting member 621, the range of illumination of the back surface of the light-transmitting member 621 by the light emitted from the LED 624a can be widened. This allows the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a to be enlarged, enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the LED 624a can be enlarged, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, creating a sense of unity between the light-transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

As shown in FIG. 45, the light-transmitting member 621 is positioned closer to the front than the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and is formed with its outer edge extending to a position where it overlaps with the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front, making it easier to shield (make difficult to see) the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 from the player. Also, the pattern of the light-transmitting member 621 formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a and the pattern displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be brought closer together, making it easier to create a sense of unity between the light-transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Furthermore, by connecting the surface of the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and the back surface of the light-transmitting member 621, the reflective member 625 surrounds the area on the base member 624 on which the LED 624a is mounted and the area on the light-transmitting member 621 on which the pattern is formed, and the back surface of the reflective member 625 is inclined in a direction away from the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 as it moves from the light-transmitting member 621 toward the base member 624. This allows the back surface of the light-transmitting member 621 to be brought close to the outer peripheral surface of the decorative pattern display device 800, and the decorative pattern display device 800 to be inserted into the back side of the back surface of the light-transmitting member 621 (the decorative pattern display device 800 to be brought close to the base member 624), while maintaining the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the LED 624a. As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and it is also easy to create a sense of unity between the light-transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

In addition, since the LEDs 624a are mounted on both sides of the base member 624, different patterns can be formed (displayed) independently on the light-transmitting member 621 by the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on one side and the light emitted from the LEDs 624a mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of base members 624 arranged between the adjacent decorative pattern display devices 800 can be reduced to one. This reduces the space required for arranging the base member 624, and allows the decorative pattern display device 800 to be inserted deeper into the back of the light-transmitting member 621 (bringing the decorative pattern display device 800 closer to the base member 624). As a result, the axial end face of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily shielded from the player (making it difficult to see), and a sense of unity between the light-transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be easily formed.

Furthermore, as described above, the reflective surface 625a1 is formed at an obtuse angle with respect to the side of the base member 624 (i.e., the light emitted from the LED 624a intersects with the reflective surface 625a1 at an acute angle), so that the light can be reflected outward. This allows the reflective member 625 to be smaller (than when the reflective surface 625a1 is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the side of the base member 624). This allows more space to be secured on the rear side of the second segment unit 620. As a result, the second segment unit 620 and the decorative pattern display device 800 can be arranged close to each other, which makes it easier to create a sense of unity between the light-transmitting member 621 and the decorative pattern display device 800.

Next, the relationship between the LED 624a and the recess 625b will be described with reference to Figures 46 and 47. Figure 46 is a side view of the base member 624. Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view of the second segment unit 620 taken along line XLVII-XLVII in Figure 42(a).

As shown in FIG. 46, the LED 624a is formed in a square shape when viewed from the side, and is capable of irradiating light from the entire area of the square. The LEDs 624a are arranged spaced apart at an inclination angle θ1 in the circumferential direction around an axis that is substantially the same as the curved axis on the front side of the base member 624. This makes it possible to disperse heat that accumulates in the base member 624 due to irradiation by the LEDs 624a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the base member 624 from becoming too hot in certain parts, causing damage to the LEDs 624a.

In this embodiment, eight LEDs 624a are distributed around the circumference. The LEDs 624a are also arranged so that one side of the square light-emitting surface is aligned with the tangent direction of the curved shape of the base member 624.

Here, a gaming machine has been known that includes a substrate (base member 624) on which multiple light-emitting means (LEDs 624a) are mounted, and a transparent member (light-transmitting member 621) that transmits light emitted from the light-emitting means, and the transparent member (light-transmitting portion 621a of the light-transmitting member 621) is curved, and the multiple light-emitting means are arranged along the curve of the transparent member. In this case, the multiple light-emitting means are arranged so that they are equally spaced when viewed from the front of the transparent member. That is, they are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by the multiple light-emitting means. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the spacing between adjacent light-emitting means in some of the multiple light-emitting means is narrowed, which causes a problem that the distribution of heat generated by the light-emitting means is uneven. As a result, heat is concentrated in some of the light-emitting means, which is likely to shorten the lifespan.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the LEDs 624a are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, so that the interval between adjacent LEDs 624a can be made constant for each LED 624a, and the distribution of heat generated by the LEDs 624a can be made uniform. As a result, the concentration of heat on some LEDs 624a can be suppressed, and the lifespan of each LED 624a can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 47, the recesses 625b are formed one by one on the back side (the right side in FIG. 47) of each LED 624a. In addition, the distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of each recess 625b is set to be the same for each recess 625b.

As described above, the LEDs 624a are disposed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction at an inclination angle of θ1. For this reason, the vertical spacing between each LED 624a is narrower at the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in Figure 46) than at the outer vertical direction. As a result, the amount of light reflected by the reflective member 625 and irradiated toward the player is greater at the vertical center (the vertical center becomes darker), which causes the problem that the light cannot be seen evenly by the player.

In other words, when the LEDs 624a are arranged at equal intervals (i.e., at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the light-transmitting portion 621a, the LEDs 624a are arranged at unequal intervals when viewed from the front of the light-transmitting portion 621a. That is, when viewed from the front of the light-transmitting portion 621a, there are areas where the LEDs 624a are spaced apart from one another in a narrow region and areas where they are spaced apart in a wide region. This results in a non-uniform distribution of the amount of light along the direction in which the LEDs 624a are arranged.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a reflecting member 625 is provided that reflects the light emitted from the LEDs 624a toward the light transmitting portion 621a. The reflecting member 625 has a plurality of recesses 625b that are partitioned to correspond to the plurality of LEDs 624a. The partition widths of the plurality of recesses 625b in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a are set to be approximately the same, so that the amount of light of each recess 625b visible in the front view of the light transmitting portion 621a can be made approximately the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of LEDs 624a can be made uniform.

In other words, the distance X1 from one end (lower end) to the other end (upper end) in the vertical direction of each recess 625b is set to be the same, so the area of light emitted to the player by the illumination of each LED 624a can be made approximately the same in the vertical direction. This prevents the amount of light irradiated to the player from being too high in the vertical center. As a result, the light can be viewed uniformly by the player.

In addition, since the light-emitting surface of the LED 624a is formed in a rectangular shape (square) when viewed from the front, light diffusion can be ensured (light can be emitted at a wider angle) compared to, for example, a case in which the light-emitting surface is circular, and the distribution of the amount of light in one recess 625b can be made uniform.

The light-emitting surface refers to the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, when the light-emitting surface is rectangular in front view, this means that the shape of the encapsulating resin in front view (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

Furthermore, at least some of the multiple LEDs 624a are arranged with one side of the light-emitting surface aligned along the tangent direction of the curved shape of the light-transmitting portion 621a, so that the light emitted from the LEDs 624a can be easily diffused uniformly along the curvature of the light-transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visible after passing through the light-transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

In addition, the recess 625b faces the back surface of the light-transmitting portion 621a and is formed as a curved surface recessed toward the side away from the back surface of the light-transmitting portion 621a, and the light-emitting surface of the LED 624a faces the area between the light-transmitting portion 621a and the recess 625b, so that the base member 624 can be arranged in a position perpendicular to the light-transmitting portion 621a. That is, the degree of freedom in arranging the unit consisting of the light-transmitting portion 621a, the base member 624, and the reflecting member 625 can be increased. In this case, the recess 625b is arranged in a manner that surrounds the periphery of the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED 624a from a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, so that the light reflected by the recess 625b can be uniformly incident on the back surface of the light-transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visible through the light-transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

Next, the manner in which the light is emitted by the LED 624a will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In FIG. 48, the light emitted by the LED 624a is shown by a two-dot chain line and is also shown with the symbol of the illumination region SR1.

As shown in FIG. 48, by emitting light from the LED 624a, the first segment unit 610 is irradiated with light from two irradiation areas SR1 arranged in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 48). Also, the second segment unit 620 is irradiated with light from irradiation areas SR1 arranged in a 2×2 pattern vertically and horizontally. The irradiation areas SR1 of the second segment unit 620 are formed on the left and right sides of the decorative portion 621a3 of the light-transmitting member 621.

Therefore, the left and right sides of the numbers can be displayed using the seven-segment display by the illumination area SR1 of the first segment unit 610 and the left side of the illumination area SR1 of the second segment unit 620. The top, bottom, and center of the numbers using the seven-segment display will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the displacement unit 650 will be described with reference to Figures 49 and 50. Figure 49 is an exploded perspective front view of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and Figure 50 is an exploded perspective rear view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that Figures 49 and 50 show the displacement unit 650 of the vertical displacement unit 600L in an exploded state.

As shown in Figures 49 and 50, the displacement unit 650 is mainly formed by a pair of base members 660 arranged on the left and right, a displacement member 670 that is supported by the base members 660 and rotates and displaces, and a drive means 680 that transmits the rotational drive of a drive motor KM3 arranged on the base members 660 to the displacement member 670.

The base member 660 is formed from a pair of plate members on the left and right, with a space in the center that is larger than the decorative pattern display device 800 described above. The base member 660 on the left side as viewed from the front has a first segment unit 610 arranged on the front side, and the base member 660 on the right side as viewed from the front has a second segment unit 620 arranged on the front side. The base members 660 are arranged upside down and left to right, and in this embodiment, only the base member 660 on the left side as viewed from the front will be described, and a description of the base member 660 on the left side as viewed from the front will be omitted.

The base member 660 is formed in a rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the side, and has a protruding portion 661 that protrudes from the front side surface in a convex curve toward the front. The base member 660 is mainly formed with a through hole 662 for inserting the shaft of the drive motor KM3 arranged at one end (upper end) in the vertical direction, an insertion hole 663 for inserting a connecting rod 681 arranged at both ends (lower end) in the vertical direction, a recess 664 in which a displacement member 670 described later is supported, a sliding groove 665 that opens in an arc shape centered on the axis of the recess 664, and engagement portions 666 that protrude into the venue above and below the recess 664.

The radius of the protruding tip of the protruding portion 661 is set smaller than the radius of the inner peripheral surface of the above-mentioned reflecting member 625, and the curved axis is set to be approximately collinear with the curved axis of the reflecting member 625. Therefore, when the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 are arranged on the base member 660, the protruding portion 661 and the reflecting member 625 can be prevented from coming into contact with each other, and the heat of the base member 624 can be prevented from penetrating between the opposing base members 660. As a result, the temperature of the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the opposing base members 660 can be prevented from rising, and the drive motors KM1 and KM2 that rotate and drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 can be prevented from being damaged.

The through hole 662 is a hole through which the shaft of the drive motor KM3 and the gear 682 connected to that shaft are inserted, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the gear 682 and set to be smaller than the main body of the drive motor KM3. Therefore, with the gear 682 connected to the drive motor KM3, the drive motor KM3 can be disposed on the base member 660. The drive motor KM3 is attached to the base member 660 from the opposing side of the base members 660 that are arranged opposite each other.

The through-holes 662 are holes for inserting the connecting rod 681 of the driving means 680 described below, and are formed larger than the outer shape of the connecting rod 681, and are formed at both the top and bottom ends of the base member 660.

The recess 664 is formed as a circular recess extending outward from the opposing side of the base member 660. The recess 664 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670, which will be described later. This allows the connecting protrusion 671b to be inserted and positioned inside the recess 664.

By inserting the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 into the sliding groove 665, the displacement member 670 can be connected to the driving means 680 disposed on the outside of the pair of base members 660. Furthermore, by inserting the connecting protrusion 671b into the sliding groove 665, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be guided. Therefore, the displacement of the displacement member 670 can be performed smoothly.

The engaging portion 666 is formed on the opposing side of the base member 660 with a gap between its tip and the opposing side surface of the base member 660 that is larger than the diameter of one end of the torsion spring SP1 described below. This allows one end of the torsion spring SP1 to engage with the engaging portion 666.

The displacement members 670 are arranged in a pair, one above the other, facing in opposite directions. The displacement members 670 are formed from an extension member 671, one end of which is supported by the base member 660, and a decorative unit 672, which is connected to the other end of the extension member 671.

The extension members 671 are formed in a generally L-shaped plate shape and are arranged in pairs facing left and right. The extension members 671 are mainly formed with an axle support hole 671a that penetrates in the left-right direction at one end of the longitudinal side, a connecting protrusion 671b that protrudes outward to the left and right at approximately the center of the longitudinal side, a protrusion 671d that protrudes in the circumferential direction of the axle support hole 671a from the side surface of the longitudinal side, and an elastic member 671f made of an elastic material and arranged on the side surface of the extension members 671.

The shaft support hole 671a is a hole into which the collar C is inserted, and its inner diameter is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the collar C. Therefore, by inserting the collar C into the shaft support hole 671a and fastening the collar C to the inside of the recess 664 of the base member 660 with a screw, the displacement member 670 can be connected in a rotatable state to the base member 660.

The shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 are arranged coaxially, and the collar C is inserted into the shaft support holes 671a of the pair of displacement members 670 and fastened to the base member 660, so that the upper and lower displacement members 670 are arranged to be rotatable on the same axis.

Furthermore, the left and right extension members 671 are formed with bulging portions 671a1 that bulge outward in the left-right direction around one of the shaft support holes 671a. The bulging portions 671a1 are formed so that their outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the recess 664 of the base member 660. The bulging portions 671a1 are also positioned on the left and right outer sides of the pair of displacement members 670.

That is, in this embodiment, a bulge 671a1 is formed in the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side, so that the right shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side is arranged inside the bulge 671a1. On the other hand, a bulge 671a1 is formed in the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side, so that the left shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side is arranged inside the bulge 671a1 (see FIG. 49).

This allows the bulge 671a1 to be inserted into the recess 664 when the displacement member 670 is disposed on the base member 660 by the collar C. As a result, when a force acts in the radial direction of the shaft of the shaft support hole 671a of the displacement member 670, the outer peripheral surface of the bulge 671a1 comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the recess 664, preventing damage to the shaft support hole 671a or collar C.

That is, in this embodiment, the pair of displacement members 670 are arranged coaxially on the base member 660, and the axial length of the collar C is accordingly increased. Therefore, when a radial force acts on the rotation shaft of the displacement member 670, the force is likely to act strongly on the rotation shaft. Therefore, the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C is likely to be damaged, but the bulge 671a1 comes into contact with the recess 664, so that the force acting radially on the rotation shaft of the displacement member 670 can be held. As a result, damage to the shaft support hole 671a or the collar C can be suppressed.

The protrusion 671d has a through hole 671d1 that penetrates in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extension member 671. The through hole 671d1 is a hole through which the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 described below are inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2.

The elastic member 671f is disposed on the side of the extension member 671 on the side in which the displacement members 670, which are disposed in a pair above and below and are approaching each other, as described below. In addition, the size is set so that the sides of the elastic members 671f come into contact with each other when the upper and lower extension members 671 are disposed in positions close to each other. This makes it possible to absorb the impact when the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 are displaced to positions close to each other.

The driving means 680 is a means for transmitting the power of the driving motor KM3 to the displacement member 670. The driving means 680 is mainly composed of a gear 682 connected to the shaft of the driving motor KM3, a large-diameter gear 683 meshing with the gear 682, a first link member 684 formed in a rod-like body, one end of which is connected to the side of the large-diameter gear 683 and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670, a connecting rod 681 that transmits power to the opposite side via the base member 660, a cam member 685 that is connected to the connecting rod 681 and rotates, and a second link member 686 formed in a rod-like body, one end of which is rotatably connected to the cam member 685 and the other end of which is connected to the displacement member 670.

As described above, gear 682 is connected to the shaft of drive motor KM3 and is rotated by the rotation of drive motor KM3.

The large diameter gear 683 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and is formed with a gear surface 683a formed on the tooth surface that meshes with the gear 682, and a protrusion 683b that protrudes in an annular shape from the side surface in the direction of the rotation axis. Since the gear surface 683a meshes with the gear 682, the large diameter gear 683 is rotated by the rotation of the gear 682. In other words, the large diameter gear 683 is rotated by the rotation of the drive motor KM3.

The protrusion 683b is formed in a circular ring shape and its axis is positioned at a different position from the rotation axis of the large-diameter gear 683. Therefore, when the large-diameter gear 683 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 683b is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The first link member 684 is formed in a rod shape, and has through holes 684a, 684b formed on both ends that penetrate in the left-right direction.

The through hole 684a is a hole into which the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 683b. The protrusion 683b is inserted into the through hole 684a, and the tip of the protrusion 683b is fastened with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 684a, so that the first link member 684 can be rotatably connected to the large diameter gear 683.

The through hole 684b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting protrusion 671b is inserted into the through hole 684b, and the tip of the connecting protrusion 671b is fastened with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 684b, so that the first link member 684 can be rotatably connected to the displacement member 670.

Therefore, when the large diameter gear 683 rotates via the gear 682, the large diameter gear 683 rotates and displaces the protrusion 683b around the rotation axis of the large diameter gear 683 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the large diameter gear 683, displacing the first link member 684, one end of which is connected to the protrusion 683b, and displacing the displacement member 670, which is connected to the other end of the first link member 684.

One end of the connecting rod 681 is inserted into the insertion hole 663 of the base member 660 arranged on the left side when viewed from the front, and is fitted inside the rotating shaft portion of the large diameter gear 683. Meanwhile, the other end of the connecting rod 681 is connected to the cam member 685. Therefore, when the drive motor KM3 is rotated, the connecting rod 681 rotates, and the cam member 685 rotates.

The cam member 685 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the side, and the connecting rod 681 is fitted inside the shaft portion. The cam member 685 also has a protrusion 685a that protrudes outward in an annular shape from the side surface in the axial direction. The protrusion 685a protrudes in an annular shape, and its axis is positioned at a position different from the rotation axis of the cam member 685. Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotationally displaced, the protrusion 685a is rotationally displaced on a circle centered on the rotation axis.

The second link member 686 is formed in the same shape as the first link member 684, but inverted from left to right. The second link member 686 has insertion holes 686a and 686b at both ends in the longitudinal direction.

The through hole 686a is a hole into which the protrusion 685a of the cam member 685 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 685a. The protrusion 685a is inserted into the through hole 686a, and the tip of the protrusion 685a is fastened with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 686a, so that the second link member 686 can be rotatably connected to the cam member 685.

The through hole 686b is a hole into which the connecting protrusion 671b of the displacement member 670 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the connecting protrusion 671b. The connecting protrusion 671b is inserted into the through hole 686b, and the tip of the connecting protrusion 671b is fastened with a screw whose head outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 684b, so that the second link member 686 can be rotatably connected to the displacement member 670.

Therefore, when the cam member 685 is rotated via the connecting rod 681, the protrusion 685a is rotated and displaced around the rotation axis of the cam member 685 in accordance with the rotational displacement of the cam member 685, the second link member 686, one end of which is connected to the protrusion 685a, is displaced, and the displacement member 670, which is connected to the other end of the second link member 686, is displaced.

That is, this is achieved by displacing the displacement member 670, the first link member 684, and the second link member 686. Here, the operation of the first link member 684 and the operation of the second link member 686 are synchronized via the connecting rod 681, so that the displacement member 670 is prevented from tilting when displacing. As a result, the displacement member 670 can be displaced smoothly.

Next, the displacement member 670 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 51 to 53. Figure 51(a) is a front view of the displacement member 670, and Figure 51(b) is a side view of the displacement member 670. Figure 52 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 670. Figure 53 is a cross-sectional view of the displacement member 670 taken along line LIII-LIII in Figure 51(a).

As described above, the displacement member 670 is formed with an extension member 671 that is rotatably supported on the base member 660, and a decorative unit 672 that is connected to the extension member 671.

As shown in Figures 51 to 53, the extension member 671 has a connecting portion 671c formed in a plate shape on the short side (the connecting side of the decorative unit 672). A step portion 671c1 that partially protrudes in a staircase shape is formed on the surface where the connecting portions 671c of the pair of extension members 671 arranged on the left and right face each other. The step portions 671c1 are formed alternately on the left and right, and the step portions 671c1 are interlocked with each other with a specified gap between them. This makes it possible to absorb dimensional errors when the extension member 671 is molded.

The decorative unit 672 is a unit that has an LED that emits light inside and emits light toward the player. The decorative unit 672 is mainly formed with a rear cover 673 arranged on the rear side, a front cover 676 that covers the rear cover 673 and is arranged on the front side of the rear cover 673, a base member 674 arranged between the rear cover 673 and the front cover 676, and a diffusion member 675 and a lens member 677 arranged between the base member 674 and the front cover 676.

The rear cover 673 is formed as a plate-like body that is horizontally long and rectangular when viewed from the front, and the connecting portion 671c of the extension member 671 is fastened to the rear side. This allows the decorative unit 672 and the extension member 671 to be fastened together.

In addition, the rear cover 673 is formed from a resin material that is difficult for light to pass through (is opaque). The rear cover 673 has a reflecting portion 673a formed as a recess on the rear side at a position opposite the diffusing member 675 described below.

The reflecting portion 673a is formed on the lower edge of the rear cover 673 in the left-right direction, and its inner surface is painted white, which has a high light reflectance. This allows light irradiated to the inside of the reflecting portion 673a to be reflected inside the reflecting portion 673a and irradiated to the diffusing member 675 side.

The front cover 676 is formed so that its shape when viewed from the front is substantially the same as the shape of the rear cover 673, and is disposed in such a manner as to cover the front side of the rear cover 673. In addition, the front cover 676 is formed from a resin material that is capable of transmitting light, and can emit light emitted from the first LED 674a and second LED described below to the front side (player side).

The base member 674 is formed as a horizontally elongated rectangular plate-like body that is smaller than the rear cover 673 when viewed from the front. The front side of the base member 674 is mainly provided with a first LED 674a that is arranged side by side in the left-right direction on the lower edge and irradiates light toward the diffusion member 675, and a second LED 674b that is arranged above the first LED 674a and irradiates light toward the lens member 677.

The first LED 674a is disposed in a position facing the upper end of the diffusion member 675, and is disposed so as to be able to irradiate light downward on the base member 674. This makes it possible to prevent the light emitted from the first LED 674a from entering the lens member 677 described below. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to distinguish between the light emitted to the front side through the diffusion member 675 and the light emitted to the front side through the lens member 677, making it possible to prevent the player's interest from being diminished.

The second LED 674b is disposed above the first LED 674a. Therefore, the light of the second LED 674b can be incident on the lens member 677 disposed above the diffusion member 675.

The diffusion member 675 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the lower end of the rear side of the front cover 676. The diffusion member 675 is formed from an opaque white resin material that is capable of diffusing light that enters the interior. This allows the light emitted from the first LED 674a and entering the diffusion member 675 to be diffused, making the light uniform overall and outputting it to the front side (player side).

The lens member 677 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally elongated when viewed from the front, and is disposed at the upper end of the rear side of the front cover 676. The lens member 677 is formed from a transparent resin material, and has multiple protrusions formed on the rear side (not shown). This makes it easier for light emitted from the second LED 674b to enter the interior via the protrusions on the rear side. As a result, even if the amount of light emitted from the second LED 674b is reduced, the light can be made to enter the lens member 677, and the light can be made to exit to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676.

Next, referring to Figure 54, the state of the light emitted by the first LED 674a to the front side (player side) of the front cover 676 will be described. Figure 54 is a front view of the displacement member 670. Note that in Figure 54, the area of light emitted by the first LED 674a to the player side is shown by a two-dot chain line and is also shown with the symbol of the illumination area SR2.

As shown in FIG. 54, the area of light emitted toward the player by the first LED 674a is a rectangle that is long in the left-right direction at the bottom end of the decorative unit 672 (front cover 676). The displacement members 670 are disposed at both the top and bottom ends of the vertical displacement unit 600L, so that the displacement members 670 form an illuminated area SR2 at a position spaced a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction. Therefore, the illuminated areas SR2 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 can display the top and bottom of the numbers using a seven-segment display.

Next, the seven-segment display displayed by the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800 will be described with reference to Figures 55 and 56. Figure 55 is a front view of the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800. Figure 56 is a schematic diagram of the segment display device 600 and decorative pattern display device 800. Note that Figures 55 and 56 show the state in which the transparent area 821b1 of the outer reel 821 has been rotated toward the player, and the illuminated area SR1, illuminated area SR2, and transparent area 821b1 are shown by two-dot chain lines.

As shown in FIG. 55, the illumination region SR1 formed by the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 is formed in pairs arranged vertically and six lines arranged horizontally.

The illumination areas SR1 are formed in a set of four with the decorative pattern display device 800 sandwiched between them, and three such sets are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Illumination areas SR2 are arranged above and below between each set of illumination areas SR1, and a transparent area 821b1 is arranged in the middle between the top and bottom. Thus, the seven illumination areas SR1, SR2 and the transparent area 821b1 can display numbers using a seven-segment display.

As described above, the four-bar set in the illumination area SR1 is arranged in three sets in the left-right direction, so that each set forms a seven-segment display. In other words, the seven-segment displays are arranged in three sets in the left-right direction.

Therefore, the seven-segment displays arranged in the left-right direction can be made to display numbers as valid lines for the lottery for the big win of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, all seven-segment displays can be made to display the number "7"). This makes it possible to display the big win not only by the decorative pattern display device 800 described above, but also by the seven-segment displays. As a result, the player can view multiple display formats, which increases the player's interest.

The light-transmitting portions 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620 of the segment display device 600 are curved in a convex shape toward the front side, so that when a player is allowed to view the seven-segment display, the display in the vertical center closest to the player is large, and the display at both ends in the vertical direction farther from the player is small. This creates a problem in that the seven-segment numeric display cannot be clearly viewed by the player.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the width of the seven-segment display in the left-right direction increases from the top-bottom center toward the top-bottom ends. This makes it possible to make the seven-segment display uniform across the top-bottom ends and top-bottom center. As a result, the seven-segment numbers displayed can be clearly seen by the player.

In addition, the seven-segment displays on both the left and right sides are formed with the vertical center section tilted toward the horizontal center. This allows the player to clearly see the seven-segment displays on both the left and right sides.

That is, the player's viewpoint is usually located at the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Also, the segment display device 600 is located at the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction. Therefore, the player's viewpoint is located in front of the 7-segment display displayed in the center. Therefore, the farther to the left or right from the player's viewpoint, the more the 7-segment display is perceived by the player in a curved manner due to the curved shape of the light-transmitting parts 621a of the first segment unit 610 and the second segment unit 620. However, since the vertical center part of the 7-segment display is formed at an angle toward the center in the left-right direction, the 7-segment display is less likely to be perceived in a curved manner from the player's viewpoint. As a result, the 7-segment display can be clearly viewed by the player.

Next, the displacement mode of the displacement member 670 will be described with reference to Figures 57 to 60. Figures 57(a) to G01(c) are front views of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Figures 58(a), 59(a) and 60(a) are side views of the vertical displacement unit 600L, and Figures 58(b), 59(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 600L taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(a).

Note that Figures 57(a), 58(a), and 58(b) show the displacement member 670 in a retracted state, Figures 57(b), 59(a), and 59(b) show the displacement member 670 in an intermediate state, and Figures 57(c), 60(a), and 60(b) show the displacement member 670 in a protruding state.

The retracted state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair above and below are spaced apart from each other on the outside, the extended state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 arranged in a pair above and below are in contact at a middle position above and below, and the intermediate state of the displacement members 670 is a state in which the displacement members 670 are positioned between the retracted state and the extended state.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 58, when the displacement member 670 is in the retracted position, the upper displacement member 670 (upper part of Figure 57) of the pair of upper and lower members is positioned such that the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 are positioned upward, with the shaft support hole 671a as the rotation axis, and the decorative unit 672 is positioned upward.

The torsion spring SP1, which is inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 located above, has its engagement position with the through hole 671d1 at the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). This makes it possible to increase the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP1. As a result, it becomes easier for the displacement member 670 to maintain the decorative unit 672 positioned on the upper side in the direction of gravity.

On the other hand, the displacement member 670, which is located at the lower end (lower in Figure 57) of the upper and lower pair, is positioned so that the decorative unit 672 is positioned downward with the shaft support hole 671a as the rotation axis by positioning the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 downward.

The torsion spring SP2, which is inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 located below, has its engagement position with the through hole 671d1 at the base end portion on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). This makes it possible to increase the biasing force exerted by the torsion spring SP2. As a result, it becomes easier for the displacement member 670 to displace the decorative unit 672 upward in the direction of gravity.

In the retracted state, an opening is formed between the opposing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, allowing the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the upper and lower displacement unit 600L to be viewed. In this case, as described above, three patterns that decorate the inner reel 811 of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be displayed to the player in the vertical direction.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the drive motor KM3 from the state shown in Figures 57(a) and 58, the large diameter gear 683 and the cam member 685 are rotated. This causes the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 to be displaced to approximately the center position in the vertical direction of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Therefore, the displacement member 670 connected to the insertion holes 684b, 686b of the first link member 684 and the second link member 686 is rotated and displaced about the shaft support hole 671a, and is displaced via the state shown in Figures 57(b) and 59 to the state shown in Figures 57(c) and 60.

As shown in Figures 57(b) and 59, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the intermediate state position, the engagement position of the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above with the through hole 671d1 is set to the intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the engagement position in the retracted state by the amount of change in the engagement position.

Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side has an engagement position with the through hole 671d1 at the intermediate position on the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be reduced by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be reduced compared to the engagement position in the retracted state by the amount of change in the engagement position.

In the intermediate state, an opening smaller than that in the retracted state is formed between the opposing decorative units 762 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670, allowing the decorative pattern display device 800 arranged inside the upper and lower displacement unit 600L to be viewed. In this case, one of the patterns decorating the inner reel 811 of the decorative pattern display device 800 can be displayed to the player.

Therefore, by displacing the displacement member 670 from a retracted state in which three symbols are displayed vertically to decorate the inner reel 811 to an intermediate state in which one symbol is displayed vertically to decorate the inner reel 811, multiple presentation modes can be formed, and the player's interest can be increased. Also, by displaying one symbol vertically to decorate the inner reel 811, it is possible to draw the player's attention to one symbol. Therefore, the part to be focused on can be made clear, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the presentation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

As shown in Figures 57(c) and 60, when the displacement member 670 is displaced to the retracted position, the engagement position of the torsion spring SP1 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged above with the through hole 671d1 is set to the tip position of the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP1, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate state engagement position by the amount of change in the engagement position.

Similarly to the torsion spring SP1, the torsion spring SP2 inserted into the through hole 671d1 of the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side also has an engagement position with the through hole 671d1 at the tip position of the other end side (the side inserted into the through hole 671d1). Therefore, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 can be increased by the amount of deformation of the torsion spring SP2, and the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1 can be made smaller than the intermediate engagement position by the amount of change in the engagement position.

In other words, the biasing force of the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 can be made nonlinear in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 670. This makes it easier for the torsion springs SP1 and SP2 to apply the necessary biasing force depending on the displacement position of the displacement member 670. As a result, the energy required to drive the drive motor KM3 can be minimized.

In the extended state, the decorative units 672 of the pair of upper and lower displacement members 670 abut at the vertical middle position of the vertical displacement unit 600L. In this case, the decorative units 672 are positioned on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 800, making it possible to make the display of the decorative pattern display device 800 invisible from the player side (front side).

Therefore, by putting the displacement member 670 in the extended state, rotating and displacing the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820, and then displacing the displacement member 670 to the intermediate state or the retracted state, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that the patterns will line up (that a jackpot has been drawn). As a result, the player's interest can be heightened.

In the above embodiment, the upper and lower pair of displacement members 670 are described as displacing by the same amount, but this is not limited thereto. It is also possible to rotate one of the two drive motors KM3 to displace only one of the upper and lower pair of displacement members 670 to an intermediate or extended position.

The maximum displacement of the pair of displacement members 670 arranged above and below is not set to an intermediate position, but can be displaced beyond the position shown in FIG. 60. In other words, the pair of displacement members 670 can be displaced above and below while in contact with each other.

Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 600L will be described with reference to Figs. 61 to 63. Figs. 61 to 63 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Note that Figs. 61 to 63 sequentially illustrate the transition states of the displacement member 670.

In addition, in Figures 61 to 63, the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means that drives the displacement member 670 are described with a U at the end of their reference numbers, and the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means that drives the displacement member 670 are described with a D at the end of their reference numbers.

As shown in FIG. 61, the vertical displacement unit 600L has extension members 671 of the displacement member 670 disposed on both the left and right sides. The pair of extension members 671 are each connected to either the driven side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted via a connecting rod 681, or the drive side to which the driving force of the drive motor KM3 is transmitted by a protrusion 683b of a large diameter gear 683.

As shown in FIG. 62, when the vertically arranged displacement members 670 are displaced, the sides of the decorative units 672 come into contact with each other at the vertical center of the vertical displacement unit 600L.

As shown in Figure 63, by displacing both of the displacement members 670 in the same direction from the state shown in Figure 62, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction while their sides are in contact with each other.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first displacement member (decorative unit 672U) and a second displacement member (decorative unit 672D) that are arranged opposite each other and are formed so that they can be displaced in the same direction while their opposing sides are in contact with each other. According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where their opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to shield an object (e.g., a liquid crystal display device or a performance member) located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, the shielding is released with the displacement, and a performance that makes the object visible can be performed. In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (e.g., reciprocating displacement in one direction and the other direction) while their opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to perform a performance before the shielding of the object is released (a performance that draws attention to the shielding release operation) while maintaining the shielding of the object.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the components, it is difficult to bring the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members into close contact with each other, and there is a risk of a gap forming between the opposing edges. If a gap forms between the opposing edges, the player can see the object on the rear side through the gap, impeding the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, a base member 660 is provided, and driving means 680U and driving means 680D are provided which respectively support decorative unit 672U and decorative unit 672D on the base member 660 in a displaceable manner, and the support mode of driving means 680U is biased to one side of the opposing side of decorative unit 672U, and the support mode of driving means 680D is biased to one side of the opposing side of decorative unit 672D which is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of decorative unit 672D which abuts against one side of the opposing side of decorative unit 672U. Therefore, when the opposing sides of decorative unit 672U and decorative unit 672D are abutted against each other, the support mode of driving means 680U and the support mode of driving means 680D can be biased to opposite sides (sides rotated 180° around the center of one side and the other side of the opposing sides as the center of rotation). This makes it easier to bring the opposing edges of the decorative units 672U and 672D into close contact with each other, and prevents gaps from forming between the opposing edges (see Figure 63).

In this embodiment, the number of components arranged on one side and the other side (both left and right sides) is different, so the driving force transmitted to the left and right of the decorative unit 672 is different, and the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D can face their own high rigidity side (low side) to the other's low rigidity side (high side). Therefore, when the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are abutted against each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D can each push the other (move forward) on the high rigidity side and accept the other (move backward) on the low rigidity side. As a result, the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

The driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decorative unit 672U to the base member, and a first link member 684U and a second link member 686U that transmit the driving force of the driving motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U and have different configurations. The driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that connect the decorative unit 672D to the base member 660, and a second link member 686D and a first link member 684D that transmit the driving force of the driving motor KM3U to the pair of extension members 671U and have different configurations. This makes it easier to bring the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D into close contact with each other, and prevents gaps from being formed between the opposing sides.

In other words, when the opposing edges of decorative unit 672U and decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of drive means 680U and drive means 680D can, for example, push the other (move forward) on the side with the larger drive force or the side with the earlier drive force transmission timing, and receive the other (move backward) on the side with the smaller drive force or the side with the later drive force transmission timing. As a result, it is easier to bring the opposing edges of decorative unit 672U and decorative unit 672D into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between the opposing edges can be suppressed.

In addition, the extension members 671U and 671D are formed to be approximately the same length, and one end is connected to the decorative unit 672U or the decorative unit 672D while the other end is rotatably supported on the base member 660 on the same axis. Therefore, when the decorative units 672U and 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is easy to maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the support mode is biased.

Furthermore, an elastic member 671f made of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on the extension member 671U or the extension member 671D, and when the decorative units 672U and 672D are in a state where their opposing sides are in contact with each other, an elastic body is interposed between the extension members 671U and 671D in an elastically compressed state. Therefore, when the decorative units 672U and 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is easy to maintain the state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the support mode is biased.

As described above, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and connect the decorative unit 672U to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP1 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671U, and the driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671D that are driven by the driving motor KM3D and connect the decorative unit 672D to the base member 660, and two torsion springs SP2 that apply different biasing forces to the pair of extension members 671D, making it easier to bring the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D into close contact with each other and preventing gaps from being formed between the opposing sides.

In other words, when the opposing edges of the decorative units 672U and 672D are in contact with each other, the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D can, for example, push the other (move forward) on the side with the larger force, while accepting the other (move backward) on the side with the smaller force. As a result, the opposing edges of the decorative units 672U and 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and gaps can be prevented from being formed between the opposing edges.

The two torsion springs SP1 may have the same configuration. In other words, the positions at which the biasing force is applied may be different, or the amounts of elastic deformation may be different, so that the biasing forces applied to the pair of extension members 671U are different. The same applies to the two torsion springs SP2.

Furthermore, the driving means 680U includes a driving motor KM3U that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671U that are driven by the driving motor KM3U and connect the decorative unit 672U to the base member 660, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extension members 671U, and the driving means 680D includes a driving motor KM3D that generates a driving force, a pair of extension members 671D that are driven by the driving motor KM3D and connect the decorative unit 672D to the base member 660, and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of extension members 671D, so that the opposing sides of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In other words, when the opposing edges of decorative unit 672U and decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, each of drive means 680U and drive means 680D can, for example, push the other (move forward) on the side on which the urging force is applied, while accepting the other (move backward) on the side on which the urging force is not applied. As a result, it is possible to easily bring the opposing edges of decorative unit 672U and decorative unit 672D into close contact with each other, and it is possible to prevent gaps from being formed between the opposing edges.

As described above, the torsion spring SP1 is formed as a torsion spring, with one leg connected to the extension member 671U and the other leg connected to the base member 660, and applies a biasing force in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D. Therefore, when displacing the decorative unit 672U in a direction that brings it closer to the decorative unit 672D, the driving force of the drive motor KM3U required to rotate the extension member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP1. Therefore, for example, when displacing the decorative unit 672U from a stopped state from a retracted position away from the decorative unit 672D to an abutment position where it abuts against the decorative unit 672D, the displacement can be started smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671U is rotated in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D, at least one of the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the extension member 671U or the connection position between the other leg of the torsion spring SP1 and the base member 660 is moved away from the winding part, so that the distance from the winding part to the position where the force acts becomes longer, and the biasing force in the direction that brings the decorative unit 672U closer to the decorative unit 672D can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when stopping the decorative unit 672U that has been brought closer to the decorative unit 672D, the displacement can be reliably stopped, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. In addition, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides abutting against each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be increased, and the presentation effect can be improved.

On the other hand, the torsion spring SP2 is formed as a torsion spring, with one leg connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg connected to the base member, and applies a biasing force in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672D closer to the decorative unit 672U. As the extension member 671D is rotated in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672D closer to the decorative unit 672U, at least one of the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the connection position between the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the base member is moved away from the winding part, so that the torsion spring SP2 has the same effect as the torsion spring SP1. In particular, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides abutting against each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both, which is particularly effective. Furthermore, the configuration of torsion spring SP1 and torsion spring SP2 is particularly effective when decorative unit 672U and decorative unit 672D are at the same height (placed in the gravity direction), the position where they abut is the highest position (or lowest position) in the gravity direction, and the position where they separate (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the gravity direction.

Since the decorative unit 672U is brought into proximity with the decorative unit 672D by its upward displacement in the direction of gravity, the further downward the decorative unit 672U is positioned in the direction of gravity, the stronger the urging force in the direction of displacing the decorative unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity (i.e., the further upward the decorative unit 672U is positioned in the direction of gravity, the weaker the urging force in the direction of displacing the decorative unit 672U upward in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the decorative unit 672U is displaced (raised) from a stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be started smoothly, and when the raised decorative unit 672U is stopped, the displacement can be stopped reliably not only by the action of gravity but also by the weakening of the biasing force. As a result, damage due to collision with the decorative unit 672D can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the decorative unit 672U that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity is stopped, the biasing force is strengthened, so that the biasing force can be used to counter the action of gravity that tries to continue the descent. As a result, the decorative unit 672U can be stopped reliably.

It is formed as a torsion spring, with one leg connected to the extension member 671D and the other leg connected to the base member 660, and is equipped with a torsion spring SP2 that applies a biasing force in a direction that moves the decorative unit 672D away from the decorative unit 672U. Since the decorative unit 672D is moved away from the decorative unit 672U by being displaced upward in the direction of gravity, when the decorative unit 672D is displaced in a direction away from the decorative unit 672U, that is, when it is necessary to displace (raise) the decorative unit 672D against the direction of gravity, the driving force of the drive motor KM3D required to rotate the extension member 671U can be assisted by the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the extension member 671D is rotated in a direction that brings the decorative unit 672D closer to the decorative unit 672U, at least one of the connection position between one leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the extension member 671D or the connection position between the other leg of the torsion spring SP2 and the base member 660 is moved away from the winding portion, so that the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force is applied is increased, and the biasing force in the direction that moves the decorative unit 672D away from the decorative unit 672U (the direction that moves the decorative unit 672D upward in the direction of gravity) can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are displaced back and forth in the same direction with the opposing sides abutting against each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be increased and the presentation effect can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment will be described. In the above first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a mountain shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. However, the protrusion 2812a formed on the rotating member 2812 of the second embodiment is formed in a curved hemisphere. Note that the same parts as those in the first embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 64(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 2812 in the second embodiment, and Figure 64(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 2812 taken along line LXIVb-LXIVb in Figure 64(a). Note that Figure 64(a) corresponds to Figure 36(a).

As shown in FIG. 64, the hub 812a of the rotating member 2812 is formed with protrusions 2812a1 that protrude toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals around the circumference of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 2812a1 is curved in a bowl shape. This allows air to be pushed out and wind to be generated when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the opposing outer reel. This allows dust (dirt) that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, or dust that is about to attach, to be blown away. As a result, dust can be prevented from attaching to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, the protrusion 2812a1 of the second embodiment is curved in a bowl shape, so that its rigidity can be made higher than that of the protrusion 812a1 of the first embodiment. As a result, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated and wobbles, the tip of the protrusion 2812a1 comes into contact with the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820, and damage to the protrusion 2812a can be suppressed.

Next, the outer reel unit 820 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 65 and 66. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 is formed on the rotating member 812, but in the second embodiment, the protrusion 3824a is formed on the edge portion 824. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the third embodiment, Figure 66 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and Figure 66 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 along line LXVIb-LXVIb in Figure 66 (a).

As shown in Figures 65 and 66, the edge 824 on the extension line of the spokes 3822 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed with a protrusion 3824a that protrudes toward the rotating member 812 of the inner reel unit 810. The protrusion 3824a is formed on the outer end (the outer reel 821 side) of each spoke 3822.

The protrusions 3824a are formed so that both sides are inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. Therefore, by rotating the outer reel unit 820, air can be pushed out to generate wind. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the hub 812a of the opposing inner reel unit 810 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel. This makes it possible to blow away dust (dirt) that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, or dust that is about to attach to it. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from attaching to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 67 and 68. In the above first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 formed on the rotating member 812 is formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. However, the protrusion 4812a formed on the rotating member 4812 of the fourth embodiment is formed inclined relative to the radial direction of the hub 812a. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 67 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fourth embodiment, Figure 68 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 4812, and Figure 68 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 4812 taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in Figure 68 (a).

As shown in Figures 67 and 68, the hub 812a of the rotating member 4812 is formed with protrusions 4812a1 that protrude toward the edge portion 824 of the outer reel unit. The protrusions 4812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals around the circumference of the hub 812a.

The protrusion 4812a1 is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view, and is formed in such a way that its longitudinal direction intersects with the radial direction of the hub 812a. That is, the protrusion 4812a1 is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radial outer end to the radial inner end of the hub 812a. In addition, the inclination direction is formed to be inclined toward the normal rotation direction of the inner reel unit 810.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated, air can be pushed out to generate wind. Furthermore, the pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821, and is caused to flow between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the outer reel 821. This makes it possible to blow away dust (dirt) that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, or dust that is about to attach thereto. As a result, dust can be prevented from attaching to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In addition, the protrusion 4812a1 of the fourth embodiment is formed to be inclined in the circumferential direction from the radial outer end to the radial inner end of the hub 812a, and the inclination direction is set to the normal rotation direction of the inner reel unit 810, making it easier to generate wind by the rotation of the inner reel unit 810. As a result, it is possible to prevent dust from sticking to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, at least a part of the outer reel 821 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed to be light-transmitting, and multiple symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction on the inner reel 811 of the inner reel unit 810, so that the player can visually see the change in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the inner reel unit 810 through the outer reel unit 820. In this case, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, that is, the protrusion 4812a1 is erected on the hub 812a of the inner reel unit 810, which rotates more times than the outer reel unit 820, so that the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased in the performance by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810.

Next, the inner reel unit 5810 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 69 and 70. In the first embodiment, the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are formed so as to be inclined toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they move radially outward. In the fifth embodiment, the spokes 5812c of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed so as to be inclined toward the opposite side of the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they move radially outward. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment. Figure 70(a) is a partially enlarged view of the circular member 813, and Figure 70(b) is a cross-sectional view of the circular member 813 taken along line LXXb-LXXb in Figure 70(a). Note that in the decorative pattern display device 800 in the fifth embodiment, the backlight unit 830 is removed.

As shown in Figures 69 and 70, in the fifth embodiment, the spokes 812c of the rotating member 5812 of the inner reel unit 5810 are formed so that they are inclined toward the opposite side to the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 as they move radially outward. Therefore, the inclination direction of the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the inclination direction of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are symmetrical.

In addition, protrusions 5813a are formed on the surface of the circular member 813 of the inner reel unit 5810 that faces the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 70). A number of protrusions 5813a are formed at regular intervals around the circumference of the circular member 813.

The protrusion 5813a is formed in a mountain shape that slopes on both sides along the circumferential direction of the annular member 813. This allows air to be pushed out and wind to be generated when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. The pushed-out air (wind) collides with the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel 821 and flows into the space between the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel. This allows dust (dirt) that is attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, or dust that is about to attach, to be blown away. As a result, dust can be prevented from attaching to the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Here, if the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820 and the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 are positioned on both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800, it will not be possible to supply sufficient air to the space between them (the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820), and the drive motors KM1, KM2 that drive the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 will not be able to be sufficiently cooled, which could result in the drive motors KM1, KM2 failing to operate.

In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the protrusion 5813a can generate a flow of air that flows between the opposing outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel, and this air flow can make it easier to draw in air from both the left and right sides of the decorative pattern display device 800. Therefore, air can be sent to the space between the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. As a result, the drive motors KM1 and KM2 can be cooled, which can prevent the drive motors KM1 and KM2 from breaking down.

Next, the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 73. In the first embodiment, the protrusion 812a1 is formed only on the inner reel unit 810, but in the sixth embodiment, the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a are formed on the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 71 is a cross-sectional view of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the sixth embodiment. Figure 72(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 6812, and Figure 72(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 6812 taken along line LXXIIb-LXXIIb in Figure 72(a). Figure 73(a) is a partially enlarged view of the outer reel unit 820, and Figure 73(b) is a cross-sectional view of the outer reel unit 820 taken along line LXXIIIb-LXXIIIb in Figure 73(a).

As shown in Figures 71 to 73, the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812 is formed with protrusions 6812a1 that protrude toward the edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820. The protrusions 2812a1 are formed at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the hub 812a. The protrusions 6812a1 are also formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the hub 812a.

The edge 824 of the outer reel unit 820 is formed with protrusions 6824a that protrude toward the hub 812a of the rotating member 6812. The protrusions 6824a are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821. The protrusions 6824a are also formed in a mountain shape with both sides inclined along the circumferential direction of the outer reel 821.

The protrusion 6812a1 is formed radially inward of the rotating member 6812 relative to the protrusion 6824a. This prevents the protrusion 6812a1 from colliding with the protrusion 6824a when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated.

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820 is rotated, the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a can generate wind. In other words, wind can be generated by rotating either the inner reel unit 810 or the outer reel unit 820.

In this case, the air pushed out by either the protrusion 6812a1 or the protrusion 6824a can be made to collide with the other of the protrusions 6812a1 or the protrusions 6824a, so the air flow can be further regulated. This makes it possible to speed up the flow of air flowing between the opposing outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821. This makes it possible to blow away dust (dirt) that is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821, or dust that is about to attach thereto. As a result, dust can be prevented from attaching to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

That is, in the sixth embodiment, the protrusions 8624a and the protrusions 6812a are erected at different radial positions on the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a, respectively, so that when either the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810 is rotating, the protrusions 8624a and the protrusions 6812a can be displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the edge portion 824 and the outer surface of the hub 812a to generate wind pressure. Therefore, in the performance caused by the rotation of the outer reel unit 820 or the inner reel unit 810, the opportunities to clean the inner surface of the outer reel 821 and the outer surface of the inner reel 811 can be increased.

The radially opposing surfaces of the protrusions 6812a1 and 6824a are inclined. This reduces air resistance when air flows in the radial direction. As a result, it becomes easier to blow away dust (dirt) that is attached to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821 or dust that is about to attach to the outer circumferential surface of the inner reel 811 or the inner circumferential surface of the outer reel 821.

Furthermore, the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6812a1 and the circumferential spacing of the protrusions 6824a are formed at different intervals. This allows the positions at which the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a overlap in the radial direction to be shifted. Therefore, the positions at which the air is compressed by the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a overlapping in the radial direction can be dispersed into multiple positions. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotation speed of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820 from being slowed down by the protrusions 6812a1 and the protrusions 6824a overlapping in the radial direction to compress the air.

Next, the rotating member 7533 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 to 77. In the above first embodiment, the first electric role 520 is driven symmetrically in the same manner on the left and right, but in the seventh embodiment, the first electric role 520 is driven differently on the left and right. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figure 74. Figure 74(a) is a front view of the rotating member 7533 in the seventh embodiment, and Figure 74(b) is a side view of the rotating member 7533.

As shown in FIG. 74, the rotating member 7533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies formed in a roughly L-shape in side view side by side at a predetermined width in the left-right direction, and connecting the opposing ends on one end with a connecting portion 533a. The plate-like bodies arranged at both the left and right ends are arranged so that the bending angles of the roughly L-shape in side view are different on the left and right. In the seventh embodiment, the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the left side in front view is set to be larger than the bending angle of the L-shape of the plate-like body formed on the right side in front view.

Therefore, the drive section 7533d formed as a recess on the other end side (left side of Fig. 74(b)) of the rotating member 7533 is formed at different positions in the up-down direction on the left and right. In addition, the width of the recess (the width in the up-down direction on the left side of Fig. 74(b)) of the drive section 7533d is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the protrusion 523 formed on the first electric role 520, and the protrusion 523 is formed to be able to slide inside the drive section 7533d.

The width dimension of the rotating member 7533 in the left-right direction when viewed from the front (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set to be smaller than the dimension between the inner surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532. This allows the rotating member 533 to be positioned between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 532.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the dimension between the opposing left and right plate members of the rotating member 7533 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. This allows the game ball to pass inside the rotating member 7533 (between the two opposing plate members).

The rotating member 7533 is mainly formed with a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes on both the left and right sides from the bent portion of the approximately L-shape in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes on both the left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and a drive part 7533d that is recessed into the tip of the other end of the approximately L-shape in side view.

Next, the driving mode of the first electric role 520 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 75 to 76. Figures 75(a) to 75(c) are side views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric role 520. Figures 76(a) to 76(c) are front views of the drive unit 530 and the first electric role 520.

Note that Figs. 75(a) and 76(a) show the first state of the first electric role 520, Figs. 75(c) and 76(c) show the second state of the first electric role 520, and Figs. 75(b) and 76(b) show the state in which the first electric role 520 is located between the first and second states. Figs. 75 and 76 also show the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 in a transparent state.

As shown in Figures 75(a) and 76(a), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 protrudes from inside the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is pushed to the front side (left side of Figure 75(a)), and the drive unit 7533d is positioned downward. As a result, the protrusion 523 of the first electric role 520 is pushed downward, and the first state is set.

In this case, a gap is created between the inside of the right drive unit 7533d and the upper side of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (upper side in Figure 75(a)). This is created when, in the process of pushing the protrusion 523R down to a certain position by the drive unit 7533d to put the right wing member 520R into the first state, the center of gravity of the right wing member 520R shifts to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521R) when viewed from the front, causing the right wing member 520R to rotate to the first state under its own weight.

In addition, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive part 7533d and the underside of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L (the underside in Figure 75(a)).

Next, as shown in Figures 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 533 is retracted to the rear side (right side in Figure 75(b)), and the drive unit 7533d is lifted upward. As a result, the first electric role 520 rotates by pushing the protrusion 523 upward.

In this case, as described above, in the first state, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive part 7533d and the underside of the protrusion 523L of the left wing member 520L (lower side in Figure 75 (a)), so when the rotating member 533 is rotated (the drive part 533d is lifted), the engagement between the left drive part 7533d and the protrusion 523L is delayed by the amount of the gap. Therefore, the displacement of the right wing member 520R to the second state starts earlier.

Next, after passing through the states shown in Figures 75(b) and 76(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is further drawn into the inside of the main body 531a, the rotating member 533 is rotated to the rotation end position. As a result, the drive part 7533d of the rotating member 533 is lifted upward, and the first electric role 520 is brought into the second state shown in Figures 76(c) and 76(c).

In this case, a gap is formed between the inside of the left drive unit 7533d and the underside of protrusion 523R of right wing member 520R (lower side in Figure 75 (c)). This is formed when protrusion 523L is pushed up to a certain position by drive unit 7533d to place left wing member 520L in the second state, and the center of gravity of left wing member 520L switches to the left side of the rotation axis (through hole 521L) when viewed from the front, causing left wing member 520L to rotate to the first state under its own weight.

In addition, a gap is formed between the inside of the right drive part 7533d and the underside of the protrusion 523R of the right wing member 520R (the underside in Figure 75(a)).

Therefore, when the first electric device 520 is shifted from the first state to the second state, the right wing member 520R can be started first, and the left wing member 520L can be shifted to the second state after the right wing member 520R.

The transition from the second state shown in Figures 75(c) and 76(c) to the first state shown in Figures 75(a) and 76(c) is the opposite of the transition from the first state to the second state described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Therefore, when the first electric device 520 is shifted from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L can be started first, and the right wing member 520R can be shifted to the first state before the left wing member 520L.

Next, referring to FIG. 77, we will explain the case where a game ball enters the winning port unit 500 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 77(a) and FIG. 77(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500.

Note that Figures 77(a) and 77(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 500 in Figure 24(b). Also, Figures 77(a) and 77(b) show the state in which the first electric device 520 is in the process of being displaced from the second state to the first state.

As shown in Figures 77(a) and 77(b), when the first electric device 520 is shifted from the second state to the first state, the left wing member 520L is started first, and the right wing member 520R is shifted to the first state slower than the left wing member 520L.

In other words, a state in which only the right wing member 520R of the first electric device 520 is open can be instantaneously created. At this time, when a game ball enters from the right wing member 520R side, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R is guided to the front side (lower side in Figure 77 (a)) by the bulge portion 524R. This makes it easier for the game ball to collide with the bulge portion 524L of the left wing member 520L.

The bulge 524L of the left wing member 520L is formed at the end on the front side, so that a game ball that hits the bulge 524L can easily bounce back to the rear side. This makes it easier for a game ball entering from the right wing member 520R to enter the second winning hole 140.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the first electric device 520 is shifted to the first state, the left wing member 520L on the side where the bulge 524L is formed on the front side and the right wing member 520R on the opposite side are shifted after the left wing member 520L, so that the game ball that enters during the shift to the first state can be sent smoothly to the second winning opening 140.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the timing at which one of the pair of feather members 520L, 520R (one of the feather members 520L, 520R) is positioned to form the closed state is different from the timing at which the other feather member (the other of the feather members 520L, 520R) is positioned to form the closed state, making it difficult for a game ball to be caught between the pair of feather members 520L, 520R (side surfaces 526L, 526R), and therefore the opposing distance between the pair of feather members 520L, 520R can be narrowed accordingly. This makes it possible to reduce the space required for arranging the pair of feather members 520L, 520R.

Next, the rotating member 8533 of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 82. In the above first embodiment, the sliding member 532 is formed with a second protrusion 532c that restricts the entry of game balls, but in the eighth embodiment, the rotating member 8533 is formed with a second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of game balls. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is an exploded oblique front view of the drive unit 8530 in the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 78, the drive unit 8530 of the eighth embodiment is formed mainly by including a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 8533 connected to the sliding member 8532, a first case member 534 in which the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are arranged in a displaceable state, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534.

The sliding member 8532 is formed in a roughly E-shape when viewed from above, and is mainly formed with a connecting portion 532a extending in the left-right direction, two first protrusions 532b protruding from both the left and right ends of the connecting portion 532a toward the front side, and a third protrusion 532e located midway between the two first protrusions 532b and protruding toward the front side.

The sliding member 8532 is formed such that the dimension of the connecting portion 532a in the left-right direction is smaller than the dimension between the connecting portions in the left-right direction on the inner circumferential surface of the first case member 534. This allows the sliding member 8532 to be housed and positioned inside the first case member 534.

The third protrusion 8532e is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 described below, thereby restricting the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533 when the first electric role 520 is displaced to the second state. In other words, the lower end surface of the third protrusion 8532e is formed above the connecting portion 533a when the first electric role 520 is in the first state.

The rotating member 8533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies, each formed in a roughly L-shape when viewed from the side, side by side at a specified width in the left-right direction, with the opposing ends connected by a connecting portion 533a. The gap between the two opposing plate-like bodies of the rotating member 8533 is set to be larger than the diameter of a game ball. This allows the game ball to pass inside the rotating member 8533 (between the two opposing plate-like bodies).

The width dimension of the rotating member 8533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set to be smaller than the dimension between the inner surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. This allows the rotating member 8533 to be positioned between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 8533 is mainly formed with a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes on both the left and right sides from the bent portion of the approximately L-shape in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes on both the left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, a drive part 533d that is recessed into the tip of the other end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and a second protrusion 8533e that protrudes from the center position of the connecting part 533a in the left and right direction toward the front side.

The second protrusion 8533e is formed in a rod shape extending toward the front side, and includes a standing wall 8533e1 that is bent downward at the protruding tip. The standing wall 8533e1 is curved in a convex shape toward the front side in side view, and the axis of the curve is set coaxially with the axis of the rotating member 8533.

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to Figures 79 to 81. Figures 79(a) and 79(b) are side views of the first electric role device 520 and the drive unit 530. Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are front views of the first electric role device 520 and the drive unit 530. Figures 81(a) and 81(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning slot unit 500.

Note that Figs. 79 and 80 show the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 in a transparent state. Figs. 79(a), 80(a) and 81(a) show the first electric device 520 in the first state, and Figs. 79(b), 80(b) and 81(b) show the first electric device 520 in the second state. Figs. 81(a) and 81(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 17.

As shown in Figures 79 to 81, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed to the front side (left side of Figure 79 (a)), and the drive unit 533d is positioned downward. As a result, the protrusion 523 of the first electric role 520 is pushed downward, and the first state is set.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. In this case, the distance dimension L6 (see FIG. 82(a)) from the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b of the first case member 534 is made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, the erected wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the erected portion 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

Furthermore, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned above the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, when the first electric role 520 is operated to shift it to the second state, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is restricted by the third protrusion 8532e.

In other words, a transmission mechanism is provided that transmits the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531) to the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. The transmission mechanism includes a sliding member 8532 that is slidably displaced between an open slide position (position shown in FIG. 79(b)) and a closed slide position (position shown in FIG. 79(a)) by the driving force of the driving means (solenoid 531), and a sliding member 8532 that is rotated to an open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the open slide position to open the pair of wing members 520L, 520R, and that is rotated to a closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. The rotating member 8533 is provided with a vertical wall 8533e1, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the open rotation position, the vertical wall 8533e1 is disposed in the allowable position, and when the rotating member 8533 is rotated to the closed rotation position, the vertical wall 8533e1 is disposed in the restricted position. When the sliding member 8532 is disposed in the closed slide position and the rotating member 8533 is disposed in the closed rotation position, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 are engaged with each other, restricting the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position, making it easier to restrict the illegal entry of game balls into the second winning hole.

That is, even if, for example, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is forced open illegally from the outside when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is closed, or the rotating member 8533 is rotated to an open position by directly operating the rotating member 8533, the rotating member 8533 is restricted from rotating to the open rotation position by engaging the rotating member 8533 with the sliding member 8532, so that the standing wall 8533e1 can be maintained in the restricted position (i.e., illegal forcible displacement of the standing wall 8533e1 from the outside can be suppressed). As a result, the standing wall 8533e1 can restrict illegal entry of game balls into the ball entry port.

In addition, the device includes a third protrusion 8532e protruding from the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533) and a connecting portion 533a formed on the sliding member 8532 (or the rotating member 8533) that is engageable with the third protrusion 8532e. Since the third protrusion 8532e protrudes in the direction of the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532, the sliding displacement of the sliding member 8532 can be used to switch between engagement and disengagement of the third protrusion 8532e and the connecting portion 533a, thereby simplifying the structure.

The engaging portion may be a surface that the third protrusion 8532e can abut (the outer surface of the other of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533), or may be a hole or recess into which the third protrusion 8532e can be inserted (a hole or a recess formed in one of the sliding member 8532 or the rotating member 8533). That is, it is sufficient that the third protrusion 8532e abuts against the connecting portion 533a to restrict the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position. In this case, it is preferable that the connecting portion 533a is a hole or a recess. The third protrusion 8532e is inserted into the connecting portion 533a, which reduces the space required for the arrangement of the third protrusion 8532e, thereby enabling miniaturization, and the third protrusion 8532e is shielded from the outside by being inserted into the connecting portion 533a, making it difficult to illegally access the third protrusion 8532e from the outside.

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted to the rear side (right side in FIG. 79(b)), and the drive unit 533d is displaced upward. This places the first electric role 520 in the second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

In addition, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted inside the main body 531a, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned on the rear side of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. Therefore, the restriction on the rotation of the rotating member 8533 is released. As a result, the rotating member 8533 can be rotated to displace the first electric role 520.

The driving part 533d of the rotating member 8533 has an open side contact part 8533d1 that contacts and opens the pair of wing members 520L, 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position, and a closed side contact part 8533d2 that contacts and closes the pair of wing members 520L, 520R when rotated toward the closed rotation position, so that the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be prevented from being forcibly opened illegally from the outside, and unauthorized access to the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are displaced from the outside in the forced opening direction, the closing side abutment portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533 is pressed by the wing members 520L, 520R, and the rotating member 8533 is rotated toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotating member 8533 to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the displacement of the wing members can be restricted by the closing side abutment portion 8533d2 of the rotating member 8533. That is, the wing members can be restricted from being displaced from the outside in the forced opening direction. As a result, the pair of wing members 520L, 520R can be prevented from being forcibly opened from the outside, and unauthorized access to the rotating member 8533 or the sliding member 8532 from the outside can be made difficult.

When the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted inside the main body 531a, the rotating member 8533 rotates, making the distance dimension L7 (see FIG. 82(b)) from the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 to the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b of the first case member 534 larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball that has entered the second winning port 140 can be sent to the second case member 535 by rolling along the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b.

Next, referring to Figure 82, we will explain what happens if the first electric device 520 is damaged. Figures 82(a) and 82(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500. Note that Figures 82(a) and 82(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Figure 17. Also, Figure 14(a) illustrates the state in which the first electric device 520 is in the first state, and Figure 14(b) illustrates the state in which the first electric device 520 is in the second state.

As shown in Figures 82(a) and 82(b), when the protrusions 534L, 534R of the first electric device 520 are broken from the base end due to fraudulent activity, deterioration over time, etc., and the first electric device 520 is changed from the first state to the second state, the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is in a state of protruding from the main body part 531a, so that the tip of the erected wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward. Therefore, the erected wall 8533e1 can prevent the game ball from rolling on the upper end surface of the erected part 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

Therefore, when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are closed or when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are open from the outside, the arrangement of the standing wall 8533e1 is formed so as to be able to be maintained in the restricted position, so that the standing wall 8533e1 can be prevented from being displaced to the permitted position. This makes it easier to restrict the game ball from being illegally inserted into the second winning hole 140.

That is, when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is closed or when the pair of wing members 520L, 520R is open from the outside, the sliding member 8532 is operated to set the distance dimension L6 from the upright tip of the upright wall 8533e1 (the end on the lower side in the direction of gravity (lower side in FIG. 20(b))) to the upper end surface of the upright portion 534b formed in the first case member 534 to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, even if the first electric device 520 is made capable of sending a game ball to the second winning hole 140 due to a player's fraudulent act, the game ball can be prevented from entering the inside of the second winning hole 140 and rolling. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the upright portion 534b of the first case member 534 can be collided with the upright wall 8533e1 of the sliding member 8532 to stop the rolling of the game ball. As a result, when the first electric device 520 is put into the second state (allowing the game ball to be sent to the second winning hole 140) due to a player's fraudulent behavior, it becomes easier to restrict the game ball from being fraudulently sent to the second winning hole 140.

In this case, the vertical wall 8533e1 that prevents the game ball from entering the second winning opening 140 can be formed in connection with the sliding member 8532 that displaces the pair of blade members 520L, 520R, so there is no need for a separate member to prevent the ball from being illegally entered into the second winning opening 140. This allows the number of parts to be reduced, preventing an increase in manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third protrusion 8532e that prevents the second protrusion from being displaced are integrally formed with the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the number of parts of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 8530 can be reduced.

Next, the drive unit 9530 of the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 83 to 87. In the above eighth embodiment, the case was described in which the movement of the first electric role 520 was restricted when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 was in a state in which it was extended from the main body 531a, but in the ninth embodiment, the first electric role 520 is movable when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is in a state in which it is extended from the main body 531a. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective front view of the drive unit 9530 in the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the drive unit 8530 of the ninth embodiment is formed mainly by including a solenoid 531, a sliding member 8532 connected to the solenoid 531, a rotating member 9533 connected to the sliding member 8532, a first case member 534 in which the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532 are arranged in a displaceable state, and a second case member 536 attached to the rear side of the first case member 534.

The rotating member 9533 is formed by arranging two plate-like bodies, each formed in a roughly L-shape when viewed from the side, side by side at a specified width in the left-right direction, with the opposing ends connected by a connecting portion 533a. The gap between the two opposing plate-like bodies of the rotating member 9533 is set to be larger than the diameter of a game ball. This allows the game ball to pass inside the rotating member 9533 (between the two opposing plate-like bodies).

The width dimension of the rotating member 9533 in the left-right direction (the dimension between the outer surfaces of the two plate-shaped bodies) is set to be smaller than the dimension between the inner surfaces of the two first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532. This allows the rotating member 9533 to be positioned between the opposing first protrusions 532b of the sliding member 8532.

The rotating member 9533 is mainly formed with a rotating shaft 533c that protrudes on both the left and right sides from the bent portion of the approximately L-shape in side view, a protrusion 533b that protrudes on both the left and right sides from one end of the approximately L-shape in side view, a protruding portion 9533d that protrudes to the front side from the tip of the other end of the approximately L-shape in side view, and a second protrusion 8533e that protrudes to the front side from the center position of the connecting portion 533a in the left and right direction.

The protrusion 9533d is formed to protrude from the end on the front side, and is set to a length that allows the protrusions 523L, 523R of the feather members 520L, 520R to abut against its upper side (upper part in FIG. 84(a)).

Next, the operation of the drive unit 530 will be described with reference to Figures 84 to 86. Figures 84(a) and 84(b) are side views of the first electric role device 520 and the drive unit 530. Figures 85(a) and 85(b) are front views of the first electric role device 520 and the drive unit 530. Figures 86(a) and 86(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning slot unit 500.

Note that Figs. 84 and 85 show the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 in a transparent state. Figs. 84(a), 85(a) and 86(a) show the first electric device 520 in a first state, and Figs. 84(b), 85(b) and 86(b) show the first electric device 520 in a second state. Figs. 86(a) and 86(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Fig. 17.

As shown in Figures 84 to 86, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is pushed to the front side (left side of Figure 84(a)) and the protrusion 9533f is positioned downward. As a result, the first electric role 520 has the protrusion 523 pushed downward and is in the first state.

In the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring (not shown) is provided on the rotation shaft of the first electric role 520, and the biasing force of the biasing spring constantly acts on the first electric role 520 to rotate it toward the first state. This makes it possible to prevent the first electric role 520 from remaining in the second state when it is displaced to the second state by a force other than the drive of the solenoid 531 (for example, the shaking of the pachinko machine).

On the other hand, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is retracted into the main body 531a, the protrusion 533b of the rotating member 8533 is retracted to the rear side (right side in Figure 79 (b)), and the protrusion 9533f is displaced upward. This places the first electric role 520 in the second state in which the protrusion 533b is pushed upward.

In this case, the protrusion 9533f is constantly in contact with the protrusions 523L, 523R of the first electric device 520, so that the first electric device 520 can be maintained in the second state.

In addition, by extending the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 from the main body 531a and displacing the protruding portion 9533f downward from the second state, the first electric accessory 520 is rotated by the biasing force of the biasing spring and displaced to the first state.

Next, referring to Figure 87, we will explain what happens when the first electric device 520 is improperly operated. Figures 87(a) and 87(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning slot unit 500. Note that Figures 87(a) and 87(b) correspond to the cross-sectional view of Figure 17. Figure 87(a) illustrates the state in which the first electric device 520 is in the first state, and Figure 87(b) illustrates the state in which the first electric device 520 is in the second state.

As shown in Figures 87(a) and 87(b), when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is extended from the main body 531a, when the first electric device 520 is operated by a player's fraudulent act to change from the first state to the second state, only the first electric device 520 is rotationally displaced.

As a result, the tip of the standing wall 8533e1 of the second protrusion 8533e is positioned downward, and the standing wall 8533e1 prevents the game ball from rolling along the upper end surface of the standing portion 534b and being sent to the second case member 535.

In this case (when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is protruding from the main body 531a), as described above, the third protrusion 8532e of the sliding member 8532 is positioned at the upper part of the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533. This makes it possible to restrict the rotational displacement of the rotating member 8533. This makes it possible to prevent the player from manipulating the erected wall 8533e1. As a result, it is possible to prevent the store from suffering disadvantages due to fraudulent behavior by the player.

In addition, in the ninth embodiment, the second protrusion 8533e that restricts the entry of the game ball and the third protrusion 8532e that prevents the second protrusion from being displaced are integrally formed with the rotating member 9533 and the sliding member 8532, so that the number of parts of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the drive unit 9530 can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the ninth embodiment, it is possible to prevent the first electric device 520 from being damaged by a player's fraudulent behavior. As a result, it is possible to reduce losses to the facility caused by a player's fraudulent behavior.

That is, in the ninth embodiment, a biasing spring is provided to bias the pair of feather members 520L, 520R in the closing direction, and the rotating member 9533 is provided with a protrusion 9533f that contacts and opens the pair of feather members 520L, 520R when rotated toward the open rotation position, and when the rotating member 9533 is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of feather members 520L, 520R are closed by the biasing force of the biasing spring, so that when the pair of feather members 520L, 520R are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of feather members 520L, 520R do not contact the rotating member 9533, and it is possible to prevent the external force due to such forced opening from acting on the rotating member 9533. As a result, it is possible to suppress damage to the pair of feather members 520L, 520R, the rotating member 9533, or the sliding member 8532.

Note that examples of the biasing means that constantly applies a biasing force to the first electric device 520 to rotate it toward the first state include not only a spring (torsion spring or coil spring) that biases the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction by elastic recovery force, but also magnets that bias the pair of wing members 520L, 520R in the closing direction by attraction force.

Next, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 91. In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is nonlinearly decreased (or increased) in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 670. However, in the tenth embodiment, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 is changed by displacing the rotating member 10678. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 88 and 89. Figure 88(a) is a front view of the displacement member 10670 in the tenth embodiment, and Figure 88(b) is a side view of the displacement member 10670. Figure 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the displacement member 10670.

As shown in Figures 88 and 89, the displacement member 10670 of the tenth embodiment is formed mainly by including an extension member 671, an extension member 10671 arranged opposite the extension member 671, a decorative unit 672 connected to the extension member 10671 and the extension member 671, and a rotating member 10678 arranged in a rotatable state on the extension member.

The extension member 10671 is formed in a roughly L-shape when viewed from the front, and is mainly formed with an axle support hole 671a that penetrates the end of the longitudinal side in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a connecting protrusion 671b that protrudes outward to the left and right at approximately the center of the longitudinal side, and a rotating shaft 10671e that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes toward the axle support hole 671a side from the connecting protrusion 671b.

The rotating member 10678 is formed in a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the side, and is disposed on the extension member 10671 such that its longitudinal direction intersects the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal side of the extension member 10671 at a generally right angle when viewed from the side.

The rotating member 10678 is mainly formed with a shaft support hole 10678a that penetrates in the left-right direction, a through hole 10678b that is formed at one end in the longitudinal direction and penetrates in the circumferential direction of the shaft support hole 10671a of the extension member 10671, and an inclined surface 10678c that is formed by cutting out the side surface at the other end in the longitudinal direction.

The shaft support hole 10678a is a hole into which the rotating shaft 10671e of the extension member 10671 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating shaft 10671e. Therefore, by inserting the rotating shaft 10671e into the shaft support hole 10677a and screwing it to the rotating shaft 10671e, the rotating member 10678 can be arranged in a rotatable state on the extension member 10671.

Through hole 10678b is a hole into which torsion spring SP2 is inserted, and is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of torsion spring SP2.

Next, the operation of the rotating member 10678 will be described with reference to Figures 90 and 91. Figure 90 is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 600L. Figures 91(a) and 91(b) are partial enlarged views of the vertical displacement unit 600L in range XCI of Figure 90.

Note that Figure 90 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of Figure 58(b). Figures 91(a) and 91(b) show the state when the displacement members 670 and 10670 are displaced, and Figure 91(b) shows a cross-section in which the sides of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other.

As shown in FIG. 90, in the vertical displacement unit 600L in the tenth embodiment, a displacement member 670 is disposed on the upper side and a displacement member 10670 is disposed on the lower side, and the axes of the shaft support holes 671a of the displacement members 670, 10670 are disposed coaxially. That is, in the first embodiment, of the pair of displacement members 670 disposed vertically in opposite directions, the lower displacement member 670 is changed to the displacement member 10670. Note that the drive means for the displacement member 10670 is the same as the means for driving the displacement member 670 in the first embodiment, and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91, when the decorative units 672 of the displacement members 670, 10670 arranged above and below are displaced in a direction toward each other, the extension members 671, 10671 are brought closer to each other.

When the sides of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other as shown in FIG. 91(b), the inclined surface 10678c of the rotating member 10678 is in contact with the side of the extension member 671. As a result, the rotating member 10678 is rotated around the pivot hole 10678a so that the inclined surface 10678c is approximately parallel to the side of the extension member 671 (in FIG. 91(b), the rotating member 10678 is rotated counterclockwise around the pivot hole 10678a).

Therefore, the through hole 10678b formed on the opposite side of the inclined surface 10678c and the shaft support hole 10678a is also rotated in the same manner. By displacing the position of the through hole 10678b, the position at which the through hole 10678b engages with the torsion spring SP2 is changed.

In the ninth embodiment, the position of the through hole 10678b is displaced from the end side to the base end side of the torsion spring SP2. This makes it possible to increase the biasing force acting on the displacement member 10670 from the torsion spring SP2.

Therefore, when the sides of the decorative units 672 are in contact with each other, the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2 acting on the displacement member 10670 disposed below the vertical displacement unit 600L can be increased. As a result, when the displacement members 670, 10670 are displaced with the sides of the decorative units 672 in contact with each other, the sides of the decorative units 672 can be prevented from coming apart.

In addition, the extension member 10671 on which the rotating member 10678 is arranged is the driven side (the side operated via the connecting rod 681) of the driving means 680 that drives the displacement member 10670, so the driving force transmitted from the driving motor KM3 is smaller than that transmitted to the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683). The displacement of the rotating member 10678 increases the biasing force of the torsion spring SP2, thereby compensating for the lack of driving force. As a result, the sides of the decorative units 672 can be prevented from coming apart from each other.

Next, the vertical displacement unit 11600L of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 92 to 94. In the above first embodiment, the displacement member 670 is described as having a driving force transmitted from both the left and right sides, but in the eleventh embodiment, the displacement member 11670 is described as having a driving force transmitted from only one side. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

In addition, in Figures 92 to 94, as in Figures 61 to 63, the displacement member 670 arranged on the upper side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means that drives the displacement member 670 are described with a U suffix, and the displacement member 670 arranged on the lower side of the vertical displacement unit 600L and the drive means that drives the displacement member 670 are described with a D suffix.

The operation of the vertical displacement unit 11600L will be described with reference to Figs. 92 to 94. Figs. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams of the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the eleventh embodiment. Note that Figs. 92 to 94 sequentially illustrate the transition states of the displacement member 11670.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the vertical displacement unit 11600L in the 11th embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is disposed on only one side. That is, in the first embodiment, a pair of extension members 671 are disposed symmetrically on the left and right of the displacement member 670, but in the 11th embodiment, the extension member 671 is disposed on only one side.

In the eleventh embodiment, the driving means 680 is formed only on the driving side (the side connected to the protrusion 683b of the large diameter gear 683), and the extension member 671 is connected to the driving means on the driving side. Therefore, the extension members 671 of the displacement members 11670 arranged in a pair on the top and bottom of the vertical displacement unit 11600L are arranged in reverse left and right on the top and bottom.

As shown in FIG. 93, when the vertically arranged displacement members 11670 are displaced, the sides of the decorative units 672 are brought into contact with each other at the vertical center positions of the vertical displacement unit 11600L.

As shown in Figure 94, by displacing both in the same direction from the state shown in Figure 93, the decorative units 672 can be displaced in the vertical direction while their sides are in contact with each other.

In the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is arranged on one side, which slows down the drive of the decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the drive side, and there is a risk of a gap being formed between the two decorative units 672. However, since the extension member 671 is arranged on the opposite left and right sides above and below, the end of one decorative unit 672 on the opposite side to the drive side can be pushed by the end of the drive side of the other decorative unit 672. As a result, the formation of a gap between the two decorative units 672 can be suppressed.

In this case, it is preferable to delay the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672. By delaying the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672, it is possible to prevent a gap from being created between the two decorative units 672.

To explain in more detail, by accelerating the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672, the drive side end of the decorative unit 672 driven first can push out the drive side end of the decorative unit 672 driven later. Meanwhile, the drive side end of the decorative unit 672 driven first is abutted with a stronger force against the drive side end of the decorative unit 672 driven later. As a result, when the two displacement members 11670 are displaced with the sides of the decorative units 672 abutting against each other, it is possible to prevent gaps from being created between the two decorative units 672.

In addition, in the case of the eleventh embodiment, the extension member 671 of the displacement member 11670 is on one side, which makes it easier to deform the displacement member 11670 (extension member 671). Therefore, by accelerating the timing of driving the displacement member 11670 on the opposite side to the displacement direction side of the decorative unit 672, the displacement members 11670 (extension members 671) of each other can be deformed, and the elastic force generated when the displacement returns can be used to prevent gaps from being created between the two decorative units 672.

Next, referring to Figure 95, the winning port unit 500 of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the above first embodiment, the thickness of the front base 511 and the rear base 512 of the winning port unit 500 is generally constant, but in the eleventh embodiment, the thickness of the front base 511 and the rear base 512 is partially changed. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 95(a) is a top view of the winning port unit 500 in the 12th embodiment, and Figure 95(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 500 taken along line XCVb-XCVb in Figure 95(a). Note that in Figure 95(a), the front base 511 is shown as transparent, while in Figure 95(b), the front base 511 is shown as opaque. Also, in Figure 95(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the sides 526L and 526R is shown by a two-dot chain line along with the symbol of the virtual line KS1, as in Figure 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the virtual line KS1 is shown by arrow F, and the back direction is shown by arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front base 511 is formed so that the thickness in the front-to-rear direction (up-down direction in FIG. 95(b)) differs on the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140. In other words, it has a front side bulge 12511f that bulges out toward the back side at the upper right side of the second winning opening 140.

The rear base 512 is formed so that the thickness in the front-to-rear direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 95(b)) differs on the left and right sides of the second winning opening 140. In other words, it has a rear bulge 12512d that bulges out toward the rear side at the upper left side of the second winning opening 140.

The front bulge 12511f and the rear bulge 12512d are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. This prevents the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from colliding with the front bulge 12511f and the rear bulge 12512d.

In addition, the front bulge 12511f and the rear bulge 12512d have their ends positioned outward in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 95(b)) from the upper surfaces of the sides 526L, 526R when the pair of blade members 520L, 520R are in the open state. This allows game balls that flow down from the upstream side of the first electric device 520 and have the potential to be sent to the sides 526L, 526R to reliably collide with the front bulge 12511f and the rear bulge 12512d.

The front bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface opposite the front-to-rear formation position of the bulge 524R of the right feather member 520R. In other words, the front bulge 12511f is formed on the side surface located in the front-to-rear direction opposite the front-to-rear formation position of the bulge 524R.

On the other hand, rear bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface opposite the front-to-rear formation position of bulge 524L of left wing member 520L. In other words, rear bulge 12512d is formed on the side surface located in the front-to-rear direction opposite the front-to-rear formation position of bulge 524L.

This allows the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric role 520 to collide with the front side bulge 12511f and be guided to the rear side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric role 520 is sent to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, it can be moved toward the rear side. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball rolling on the side surface 526R to collide with the bulge portion 524R.

On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric role 520 can be made to collide with the rear side bulge 12512d and guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric role 520 is sent to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, it can be brought closer to the front side. As a result, the game ball rolling on the side surface 526L can be made to collide more easily with the bulge 524L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surfaces (sides 526L, 526R) can be reliably deflected by abutting against the bulges 524L, 524R. As a result, the ball can be smoothly inserted into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be prevented.

In addition, when a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one of the feather members (either feather member 520L or 520R) reaches the guide surface of the other feather member (either feather member 520L or 520R), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other feather member. This prevents a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one of the feather members (either feather member 520L or 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance, increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the ball speed can be slowed down by colliding the game ball sent to the feather members 520L, 520R with the front side bulge 12511f and the rear side bulge 12512d. Therefore, the rolling speed of the game ball rolling on the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the feather members 520L, 520R can be slowed down. As a result, the impact when colliding with the bulge portions 524L, 524R can be reduced, and damage to the feather members 520L, 520R can be suppressed.

Next, referring to Figure 96, the prize opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The prize opening unit 500 of the thirteenth embodiment is formed with a protrusion that protrudes between the opposing front base 511 and rear base 512 of the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as those of the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 96(a) is a top view of the winning port unit 500 in the thirteenth embodiment, and Figure 96(b) is a cross-sectional view of the winning port unit 500 taken along line XCVIb-XCVIb in Figure 96(a). Note that in Figure 96(a), the front base 511 is shown as transparent, while in Figure 96(b), the front base 511 is shown as opaque. Also, in Figure 96(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the sides 526L and 526R is shown by a two-dot chain line along with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1, as in Figure 24(b). Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is shown by arrow F, and the back direction is shown by arrow B.

As shown in FIG. 96, the front base 511 is formed with a protrusion 13511g that protrudes toward the rear base 512 on the left side of the second winning opening 140. In addition, the rear base 512 is formed with a protrusion 13512e that protrudes toward the front base 511 on the right side of the second winning opening 140.

The protrusions 13511g and 13512e are formed outside the displacement region of the pair of wing members 520L, 520R. This prevents the pair of wing members 520L, 520R from colliding with the protrusions 13511g and 13512e.

Protrusion 13511g is formed on the side of right wing member 520R on the same side as the front-to-rear formation position of bulging portion 524R. On the other hand, protrusion 13512e is formed on the side opposite the front-to-rear formation position of bulging portion 524L of left wing member 520L.

This allows the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric device 520 to collide with the protrusion 13511g and be guided to the front side. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric device 520 is sent to the side surface 526R of the right wing member 520R, the game ball can be kept close to the front side. As a result, when the game ball flowing down the upper right side of the first electric device 520 is sent to the side surface 526R, it is less likely to collide with the bulge portion 524R. As a result, damage to the wing member 520R can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball sent from the right side of the first electric device 520 to the side 526R of the feather member 520R is sent to the side 526R without colliding with the protrusion 13511g formed on the upper part of the feather member 520R. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the back side by colliding with the bulge 524R as it rolls along the side 526R.

On the other hand, a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric device 520 can be guided to the rear side by colliding with the protrusion 13512e. Therefore, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric device 520 is sent to the side surface 526L of the left wing member 520L, the game ball can be moved toward the rear side. As a result, when a game ball flowing down the upper left side of the first electric device 520 is sent to the side surface 526L, it is less likely to collide with the bulge portion 524L. As a result, damage to the wing member 520L can be suppressed.

In addition, the game ball sent from the left side of the first electric device 520 to the side 526L of the feather member 520L is sent to the side 526L without colliding with the protrusion 13512e formed on the upper part of the feather member 520L. In this case, the game ball can be guided to the front side by colliding with the bulge 524L as it rolls along the side 526L.

Therefore, the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surfaces (sides 526L, 526R) can be reliably deflected by abutting against the bulges 524L, 524R. As a result, the ball can be smoothly inserted into the second winning hole 140, and ball clogging can be prevented.

In addition, when a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one of the feather members (either feather member 520L or 520R) reaches the guide surface of the other feather member (either feather member 520L or 520R), the game ball can be brought into contact with the protruding portion of the other feather member. This prevents a game ball that has entered the guide surface of one of the feather members (either feather member 520L or 520R) from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance, increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, protrusions 13511g and 13512e can reduce the number of game balls that collide with bulging portions 524L, 524R of feather members 520L, 520R, thereby improving the durability of feather members 520L, 520R.

Next, the wing members 14520L, 14520R (first variable device 14520) of the 14th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 97 and 98. The wing members 14520L, 14520R of the 14th embodiment are formed with a different width dimension in the front-to-rear direction of the bulging portions 524L, 524R than in the first embodiment. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 97(a) is a perspective front view of the left wing member 520L in the fourteenth embodiment, and Figure 97(b) is a perspective front view of the right wing member 520R. Figure 98(a) is a cross-sectional view of the winning opening unit 500, Figure 98(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left wing member 520L taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in Figure 98(a), and Figure 98(c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right wing member 520R taken along line XCVIIIc-XCVIIIc in Figure 98(b).

In addition, in Figures 97(a) and 97(b), the perspective directions in the left-right direction are shown in opposite views. Also, the cross-sectional view in Figure 98(b) corresponds to the cross-sectional view in Figure 24(b). In Figure 98(a), as in Figure 24(b), the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the sides 14526L and 14526R is shown by a two-dot chain line along with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is shown by arrow F, and the back direction is shown by arrow B.

As shown in Figures 97 and 98, the left wing member 14520L is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with dimensions in the front-rear direction that are larger than the diameter of a game ball. The left wing member 14520L is mainly formed with a through hole 521L penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the gravity direction, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521L, a protrusion 523L protruding from the vicinity of the through hole 521L to the back side, a recessed portion 525L recessed in the radial direction of the through hole 521L on the end surface on the through hole 521L side, a side surface 14526L on the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R in the closed state, and a bulge portion 14524L protruding and formed on the side surface 14526L.

The side surface 14526L has an inclined surface 14526L1 that is formed by sloping upward from approximately the center position in the front-to-rear direction toward the rear side, and a smooth surface 14526L2 that is formed from approximately the center position in the front-to-rear direction toward the front side.

The inclined surface 14526L1 is formed with a downward incline from the back side (left side of FIG. 98(b)) towards the smooth surface 14526L2. As a result, of the game balls sent to the side surface 14256L, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526L1 can be guided towards the smooth surface 1452L2 by the downward incline.

The bulge 14524L is formed on the base end side of the inclined surface 14526L1 (the far side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). The bulge 14524L is formed so that its width dimension in the front-to-rear direction is smaller than half the front-to-rear width of the feather member 14520L. In other words, the front-to-rear width of the bulge 15254L is smaller than the front-to-rear width of the bulge 14524L.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L, the game balls rolling on the inclined surface 14526L1 roll toward the smooth surface 14526L2, thereby reducing the probability that the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526L will collide with the bulge portion 14524L.

On the other hand, the right wing member 14520R is formed in a generally triangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed with dimensions in the front-rear direction that are larger than the diameter of a game ball. The right wing member 14520R is mainly formed with a through hole 521R that penetrates in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion in the gravity direction, a recess 522L recessed from the front side to the back side around the through hole 521R, a protrusion 523R that protrudes from the vicinity of the through hole 521R to the back side, a recessed portion 525R that is recessed in the axial direction of the through hole 521R on the end surface on the through hole 521R side, a side surface 14526R on the opposing surfaces of the pair of wing members 14520L, 14520R in the closed state, and a bulge portion 14524R that protrudes from the side surface 14526R.

The side surface 14526R has an inclined surface 14526R1 that is formed by sloping upward from approximately the center position in the front-to-rear direction toward the rear side, and a smooth surface 14526R2 that is formed from approximately the center position in the front-to-rear direction toward the front side.

The inclined surface 14526R1 is formed with a downward incline from the back side (the right side of FIG. 98(c)) toward the smooth surface 14526R2. As a result, of the game balls sent to the side surface 14256R, the game balls sent to the inclined surface 14526R1 can be guided toward the smooth surface 1452R2 by the downward incline.

In addition, bulge 14524R is formed on the base end side of inclined surface 14526R1 (the rear side of the paper in FIG. 98(b)). Bulge 14524L is formed so that its width dimension in the front-to-rear direction is greater than half the front-to-rear width of wing member 14520L. That is, the front-to-rear width of inclined surface 14526R1 is greater than the front-to-rear width of bulge 14524L. Therefore, the front-to-rear width of bulge 14524R of right wing member 14520R is greater than the front-to-rear width of bulge 14524L of left wing member 14520L.

As described above, among the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R of the right wing member 14520R, those rolling on the inclined surface 14526R1 roll toward the smooth surface 14526R2, thereby reducing the probability that the game balls rolling on the side surface 14526R will collide with the bulge portion 14524R.

The pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment is formed in such a way that game balls flow down from the left side of the first electric device 520 and are easily sent to the side surfaces 526L, 526R of the open-state feather members 520L, 520R. To explain in detail, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the first through gate 66 that opens the pair of feather members 520L, 520R is disposed on the left side of the center frame 86, and game balls are shot toward the left side of the center frame 86 during time-saving or probability-changing. As a result, game balls flowing down the game board 13 generally flow down the left side of the game board 13 and are easily sent from the left side of the first variable device 14520 (the pair of feather members 14520L, 14520R) to the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R.

As a result, more game balls are sent to the side surface 14526L of the left wing member 14520L than to the right wing member 14520R, causing the bulge portion 14524L of the left wing member 14520L to wear out more quickly, making the left wing member 14520L more susceptible to breakage.

In contrast, in the 14th embodiment, inclined surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1 are formed on the side surfaces 14526L, 14526R, and bulging portions 14524L, 14524R are formed on the inclined surfaces 14526L1, 14526R1, and the bulging portions 14524L, 14524R on the side where more game balls are thrown are made smaller in the front-to-rear direction, so that the probability of game balls colliding with the bulging portion 14524L of the feather member 14520L on the side where more game balls are thrown is reduced, thereby preventing the bulging portion 14524L from wearing out quickly. As a result, the feather members 14520L, 14520R on the side where more game balls are thrown are prevented from becoming easily broken.

Next, referring to Figures 99 and 100, the variable winning device 15065 in the 15th embodiment will be described. In the above first embodiment, the pair of feather members 520L, 520R are formed with bulges 524L, 524R, but in the 15th embodiment, bulges 15065b, 15065c are formed in the variable winning device 65. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 99(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment, and Figure 99(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line XCIXb-XCIXb in Figure 99. Figure 100(a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 13, and Figure 100(b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 taken along line Cb-Cb in Figure 100(a).

Note that Figures 99(a) and 100(a) correspond to the partially enlarged views of Figure 29. Figure 99 illustrates the closed state of the variable winning device 15065, while Figure 100 illustrates the open state of the variable winning device 15065. Similarly to Figure 24(b), Figure 100(b) illustrates the rolling direction of the game ball rolling on the side surface 15065a with a two-dot chain line along with the symbol of the imaginary line KS1. Furthermore, the front direction of the imaginary line KS1 is illustrated with an arrow F, and the rear direction is illustrated with an arrow B.

The closed state of the variable winning device 15065 is a state in which the plane of the variable winning device 15065 formed in a board shape is positioned approximately parallel to the plane of the front side of the game board 13, and game balls flowing down the game area cannot enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. On the other hand, the open state of the variable winning device 15065 is a state in which the plane of the variable winning device 15065 is positioned approximately perpendicular to the plane of the front side of the game board 13, and game balls flowing down the game area can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

As shown in Figures 99 and 100, the variable winning device 15065 is formed as a long plate-like body extending from side to side, and is arranged so that it can rotate relative to the game board 13 around one end on the rear side as an axis. In addition, the variable winning device 15065 is connected to a drive device (not shown) on the rear side, and when a driving force is applied to the drive device, the variable winning device 15065 can be displaced between a closed position and an open position.

In addition, when the variable winning device 15065 is in the open state, two bulges 15065b, 15065c are formed on the side surface 15065a on the upper surface side. Furthermore, the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed to slope downward from both the left and right sides toward the center. This allows the game ball sent to the side surface 15065a to roll toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

Bulge 15065b is located on the left side of specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the front end face when in the open state (state of FIG. 100(b)). Bulge 15065c is located on the right side of specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a when viewed from the front, and is connected to the rear end face when in the alveolar state (state of FIG. 100(b)).

That is, the bulge portions 15065b and 15065c are formed on both the left and right sides of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and are formed at different positions in the front-to-rear direction. This prevents the game ball from colliding in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and bouncing off to the left and right sides when the game ball is sent to the left and right sides of the open variable winning device 15065.

To explain in more detail, a game ball sent to the left side of side 15065a when viewed from the front collides with bulge 15065b as it rolls toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and is guided to the rear side. On the other hand, a game ball sent to the right side of side 15065a when viewed from the front collides with bulge 15065c as it rolls toward the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and is guided to the front side.

The bulging portions 15065b and 15065c can displace the front-to-rear direction position of the game ball sent from both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a. Therefore, when the game balls are sent to both the left and right sides of the side surface 15065a and collide in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the rebound (repulsion) direction can be made to be in the front-to-rear direction. As a result, the game ball can enter the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a smoothly.

In addition, when a game ball is sent from the left or right side of the side 15065a, the game ball can be collided with one of the bulging portions 15065b or 15065c to displace its position in the front-to-rear direction, so that when the game ball rolls left-to-right on the front side of the side 15065a, the game ball can be collided with the other of the bulging portions 15065b or 15065c. As a result, the game ball sent from one side of the side 15065a can be prevented from rolling in front of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and escaping to the other side of the side 15065a.

The side 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 is formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the pair of bulges 15065b, 15065c are arranged on either side of the ball entry opening when viewed from the front, and are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side 15065a). Therefore, the game ball guided (rolling) along the side 15065a can be reliably biased by abutting the bulges 15065b, 15065c. As a result, the ball can be smoothly entered into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

In addition, one of the bulging portions 15065b, 15065c and the other of the bulging portions 15065b, 15065c are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the variable winning device 15065 (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the side surface 15065a), so that when a game ball enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be abutted against one of the pair of bulging portions 15065b, 15065c. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that enters the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 from one side (or the other side) in the width direction from passing through the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065 and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the side surface 15065a of the variable winning device 15065. As a result, the game ball can enter the specific winning hole (large opening) 65a, increasing the player's interest.

Next, the engagement between the sliding member 8532 and the rotating member 8533 in the 16th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 101. In the above-described eighth embodiment, the engagement between the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 was made possible by the abutment of the upper surface of the connecting portion 533a with the third protrusion 8532e, but in the 16th embodiment, the engagement is achieved by inserting the third protrusion 16532e into the recess of the connecting portion 533a. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 101(a) is a front view of the first electric role 520 and drive unit 8530 in the 16th embodiment, Figure 101(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric role 520 and drive unit 8530 along line CIb-CIb in Figure 101(a), and Figure 101(c) is a cross-sectional view of the first electric role 520 and drive unit 8530 along line CIc-CIc in Figure 101(b).

As shown in FIG. 101, the connecting portion 533a of the rotating member 8533 of the 16th embodiment has a recessed portion 16533a1 formed at approximately the center in the left-right direction from the rear side to the front side. The recessed portion 16533a1 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the rear.

The third protrusion 16532e of the sliding member 8532 is formed to protrude from a position facing the recessed portion 16533a1 in the front-rear direction. The front view shape of the third protrusion 16532e is formed as a horizontally elongated rectangle that is slightly smaller than the recessed portion 16533a1, and the tip is formed into a tapered shape.

As a result, when the pair of blade members 520L, 520R are in the closed state, the third protrusion 16532e can be accommodated inside the recessed portion 16533a1. As a result, the rotating member 8533 and the sliding member 8532 can be engaged.

In addition, in this case, since the engagement portion is the recessed portion 16533a1, the space required for arranging the third protrusion 16532e is reduced by the amount that the third protrusion 16532e is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, making it possible to reduce the size of the device. In addition, since the third protrusion 16532e is inserted into the recessed portion 16533a1, the third protrusion 16532e can be shielded from the outside, making it difficult to gain unauthorized access to the third protrusion 16532e from the outside.

Next, the sliding member 15732 in the 17th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 102 to 104. In the above first embodiment, the standing wall 532c1 is located upstream of the sensor device SE1 arranged on the flow path of the game ball that has entered the second winning port 140. In the 17th embodiment, however, the standing wall 17532c1 is located downstream of the sensor device SE1. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the sliding member 17532 will be described with reference to Figs. 102 and 103. Figs. 102(a) and 102(b) are side views of the first electric device 520 and the drive unit 17530 in the 17th embodiment. Figs. 103(a) and 103(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning slot unit 500.

In addition, in Fig. 102, the first case member 534 and the second case member 535 are shown as being transparent. Also, Figs. 102(a) and 103(a) show the first electric role 520 in a closed state, while Figs. 102(b) and 102(b) show the first electric role 520 in an open state. Also, Figs. 102(a) and 102(b) correspond to the cross sections of Figs. 17(a) and 17(b), respectively.

As shown in Figures 102 and 103, the sliding member 17532 in the seventeenth embodiment has a standing wall 17532c1 protruding from the lower side of the connecting portion 532a (lower side in Figure 102 (a)). The standing wall 17532c1 is set at a position where its tip exceeds the lower end surface of the second case member 535, and includes a standing wall 17532c1 formed with the tip bent toward the front side.

The length of the erected wall 17532c1 toward the front side is set so that when the first electric device 520 is in the closed state, the upper and lower sides are located below the sensor device SE1 arranged in the second case member 535.

In addition, the second case member 535 is formed with an opening 17535b that is molded through in the vertical direction (see FIG. 103(a)). The second protrusion 17532c is disposed in a state where it is inserted inside the opening 17535b.

Furthermore, the opening width of the opening 17535b in the front-rear direction is set to be larger than the sliding width of the sliding member 17532 that slides and displaces in the front-rear direction (the driving width of the solenoid 531). This allows the sliding member 17532 to slide in the front-rear direction with the second protrusion 17532c inserted inside the opening 17535b.

As shown in Figures 103(a) and 103(b), when the first electric device 520 is in the closed state, the standing wall 17532c1 is located downstream of the sensor device SE1, preventing the game ball from passing through. On the other hand, when the first electric device 520 is in the open state, the standing wall 17532c1 is positioned behind the opening of the sensor device SE1 (the hole that detects the passage of the game ball). This allows the game ball to pass through when the first electric device 520 is in the open state.

Next, referring to FIG. 104, a case will be described in which the first electric device is forcibly put into the second state due to a player's fraudulent play. FIG. 104(a) and FIG. 104(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning port unit 500. Note that FIG. 104(a) and FIG. 104(b) correspond to the cross-sections of FIG. 20(a) and FIG. 20(b), respectively. Also, FIG. 104(a) illustrates the first electric device 520 in a closed state, and FIG. 104(b) illustrates the first electric device 520 in an open state.

As shown in Figures 104(a) and 104(b), when the first electric device 520 is in the closed state, if the player commits a fraudulent act and the pair of wing members 520L, 520R are forcibly opened, causing the first electric device 520 to be in the open state, the front-to-rear position of the sliding member 17532 will be in the same position as in the closed state, as in the first embodiment described above.

Therefore, when the first electric device 520 is forced to the open state, the vertical wall 17532c1 is disposed downstream of the sensor device SE1. Therefore, the game ball that enters through the second winning hole 140 is stopped on the upper surface of the vertical wall 17532c1.

In this case, the distance from sensor device SE1 to the top surface of standing wall 17532c1 is set to a dimension that is approximately equal to the radius of the game ball. This allows the game ball that is held on the top surface of standing wall 17532c1 to be constantly detected by sensor device SE1. Therefore, when sensor device SE1 detects the game ball for a predetermined period of time, the pachinko machine 10 can detect that the first electric device 520 has been fraudulently opened. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent behavior by players and to notify the store operator of the player's fraudulent behavior.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th embodiment is equipped with a sensor device SE1 that detects game balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and the standing wall 17532c1 has a restricting position downstream of the sensor device SE1 and restricts the game ball at a position where it can be detected by the sensor device SE1. Therefore, for example, if the blade members 520L, 520R are forcibly opened and game balls are illegally admitted through the ball admission opening, the state in which the sensor device SE1 has detected the game ball can be continued. Therefore, by determining whether detection by the sensor device SE1 has continued for more than a predetermined time, it is possible to detect that game balls have been illegally admitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 105, the rotating member 18812 of the 18th embodiment will be described. In the above-mentioned second embodiment, the protrusion 2812a1 formed on the rotating member 2812 is formed at a constant radial distance from the axis of the hub 812a. However, in the 18th embodiment, the protrusion 18812a1 is formed at a different radial distance from the axis of the hub 812a. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 105(a) is a partially enlarged view of the rotating member 18812 in the 18th embodiment, and Figure 105(b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotating member 18812 taken along line CVb-CVb in Figure 105(a).

As shown in FIG. 105, the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812 in the 18th embodiment has multiple hemispherical projections 18812a1 that protrude toward the edge 824 of the opposing outer reel unit 820 (see FIG. 35).

The protrusions 18812a1 are formed so that the radial distance from the axis of the hub 812a is different from that of the adjacent protrusions 18812a. This makes it easier for the airflow generated by the first (the leading protrusion located on the rotation side) protrusion 18812a1 to collide with the second (the leading protrusion 18812a1 on the rotation rear side) protrusion 18812a1 when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. Therefore, it is easier to generate an airflow when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated. As a result, air can be sent between the opposing inner reel 811 and outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

Next, the relationship between the storage unit 880, the inner reel unit 810, and the outer reel unit 820 in the 19th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 106. In the above first embodiment, the side wall portion 881 of the storage unit 880 is formed in a plate-like body, but in the 19th embodiment, the side wall portion 881 has a plurality of openings. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 106(a) and 12(b) are cross-sectional views of the decorative pattern display device 800 in the 19th embodiment. Note that Figures 106(a) and 106(b) respectively show the state in which the outer reel unit 820 has been shifted (rotationally displaced). Also, in Figure 106(b), the opening 19881d formed in the side wall portion 881 is shown by a dashed line.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), the side wall portion 881 (see FIG. 30(a)) located on the left side of the decorative pattern display device 800 when viewed from the front is formed with a plurality of openings 19881d that penetrate in the left-right direction.

The openings 19881d are formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the inner reel unit 810 and the outer reel unit 820. The formation angle of adjacent openings 19881d is set to be approximately the same as the formation angle of the spokes 812c of the inner reel unit 810 and the spokes 822 of the outer reel unit 820. In addition, the opening dimension in the circumferential direction of the opening 19881d is set to be smaller than the width dimension in the circumferential direction of the spokes 812c and the spokes 822. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106(a), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) can be positioned next to the opening 19881d. In other words, the opening 19881d can be covered by the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) in a side view.

This prevents air from entering through the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotating.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), by rotating the outer reel unit 820 (or the inner reel unit 810) to a predetermined position, the spokes 822 (or the spokes 812c) can be positioned at a circumferential position different from the opening 19881d.

This allows air to flow in through the opening 19812c when the inner reel unit 810 (or the outer reel unit 820) is rotating. In other words, by shortening the air inflow path and reducing air resistance, it becomes easier for air to flow into the inside of the decorative pattern display device 800 (storage unit 880).

Therefore, when the inner reel unit 810 is rotated to perform an effect in which other symbols decorated on the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 are made visible to the player, the inflow of air from the opening 19881d can be restricted to make it easier for the player to see the display on the inner reel 811. On the other hand, when cleaning the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821, the inflow of intake air from the opening 19881d can be allowed to make it easier to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

The present invention has been described above based on the above-mentioned embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be constructed by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of one or more other embodiments.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of left and right wing members 520L, 520R are formed symmetrically except for the bulging portions 524L, 524R, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusions 523L, 523R of the wing members 520L, 520R may be formed on the rotating member 533 side, making the wing members 520L, 520R the same shape. In this case, the wing members 520L, 520R can be formed from the same parts, and by sharing the parts, the manufacturing costs of the wing members 520L, 520R can be reduced.

In the above first embodiment, the inclined portion 625a of the reflecting member 625 is formed on a smooth surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclined portion 625a may be curved and convex toward the light transmitting portion 621a. In this case, the light reflected by the inclined portion 625a can be easily dispersed, and can be made to be uniformly incident on the back surface of the light transmitting portion 621a. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light that is visible after passing through the light transmitting portion 621a can be made uniform.

In the above first and eleventh embodiments, the number of components arranged is different as a mode in which the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rigidity (dimensions, materials, etc. of the components) may be different between one side and the other side (both sides of the decorative member), the driving force transmitted (magnitude, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) may be different between one side and the other side, the connection state between the components on one side and the other side (for example, the number of connecting parts, the amount of rattle of the connecting parts, etc.) may be different, the ease of displacement to the other side (the biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (sliding or rotation), etc.) may be different between one side and the other side, or a combination of these may be used.

As a result, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the components, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D can face their own high rigidity side (low rigidity side) to the other's low rigidity side (high rigidity side). Therefore, when the opposing edges of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D are in contact with each other, the driving means 680U and the driving means 680D can each push the other (move forward) on the high rigidity side and accept the other (move backward) on the low rigidity side. As a result, the opposing edges of the decorative unit 672U and the decorative unit 672D can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing edges can be suppressed.

In the ninth embodiment, the first electric role 520 is displaced to the closed state by the biasing spring, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnetic body may be disposed inside the first electric role 520, and a magnet may be disposed on the front base 511 or the rear base 512, so that the magnetic force of the magnet displaces the first electric role 520 to the closed state.

In the above first and eleventh embodiments, the support state of the decorative member 752 is biased to one side when the number of components arranged is different, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first link member 684U and the second link member 686U (the second link member 686D and the first link member 684D) may be configured differently from each other when the stiffness of the components (the dimensions of the components, the number arranged, the material, etc.) is different, when the connection state between the components (for example, the number of connection parts, the amount of rattle of the connection parts, etc.) is different, or when these are combined. Due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the transmitted driving force and the transmission timing are different, and the support state of the drive means 680U and the drive means 680D are biased to one side.

In the first embodiment, the upright wall 532c1 is formed to be able to slide inside the first case member 534, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the movable body 531b of the solenoid 531 is protruding from the inside of the main body 531a, the upright wall 532c1 may protrude from the inside of the second winning opening 140 to the front side. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the second winning opening 140, it is possible to prevent the game ball from stagnating inside the second winning opening 140 (in front of the upright wall 532c1) even if the feather members 520L, 520R are opened due to fraud. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraud by the player.

In the above twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, the side shape between the opposing front base 511 and rear base 512 is changed to guide the game ball in the forward and backward directions, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, magnets may be placed inside the front base 511 and the rear base 512, and the game ball may be guided in the front-to-rear direction by the magnetic attraction of the magnets. This eliminates the need to narrow the space between the opposing front base 511 and the rear base 512, and prevents the game ball from being pinched between the opposing front base 511 and the rear base 512. In this case, it is preferable that the magnetic attraction of the magnets is such that the game ball cannot be held on the magnetic attraction surface. This prevents the game ball from being attracted to the sides of the front base 511 and the rear base 512.

In the second and eighteenth embodiments, a case was described in which multiple protrusions 2812a1, 18812a1 were formed on the hub 812a of the rotating member 18812, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple recessed grooves may be formed on the side surface of the hub 812a that faces the edge portion 824. In this case, too, an air flow can be generated by the uneven shape of the grooves, as in the second and eighteenth embodiments. As a result, air can be sent between the opposing inner reel 811 and outer reel 821 to clean the outer peripheral surface of the inner reel 811 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer reel 821.

In the above fifteenth embodiment, the variable winning device 15065 is arranged so as to be rotatably displaceable relative to the game board 13, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the variable winning device 15065 may be arranged so as to be slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction relative to the game board 13, and in the closed state, the variable winning device 15065 is recessed into the game board 13, preventing game balls from entering the specific winning hole 65a, and in the open state, the variable winning device 15065 protrudes out to the front side of the game board 13, allowing game balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which, once a jackpot is hit, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times). It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, the operation lever is operated to change the symbols, and the stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then displays the finalized identification information, in which the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and finalized due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed. If the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Concept of the invention using the winning port unit 500 as an example>
Gaming machine A1 is provided with an entrance opening formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, and a guide member having a guide surface for guiding the gaming ball to the entrance opening and formed to be displaceable, wherein the guide member has a pair of protruding portions protruding from the guide surface and formed to be able to abut against the gaming ball rolling along the guide surface, and the pair of protruding portions are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the guide surface.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes an entrance opening formed so that a gaming ball can enter, and a guide member formed to be displaceable and having a guide surface for guiding the gaming ball to the entrance opening. For example, the guide member is a pair of wing members that have a guide surface for guiding the gaming ball to the entrance opening, are arranged on either side of the entrance opening, and are rotatably supported at their base ends. In this case, JP 2003-164598 A discloses a technique in which a first groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface of one wing member, and a second groove is provided on the entire surface of the guide surface of the other wing member. According to this technique, since the first groove and the second groove are inclined in different directions, even if the gaming ball is simultaneously guided (rolled) on the guide surface of one wing member and the guide surface of the other wing member, the gaming balls can be biased in different directions (one toward the glass plate and the other toward the game board). Therefore, each of these game balls can be smoothly inserted into the ball entrance. However, the above-mentioned conventional technology has a problem in that the game balls cannot be sufficiently biased. Also, a game ball that enters from one side of the guide member may pass through the guide surface and exit from the other side of the guide member. In this case, the game ball does not enter the ball entrance, which causes a problem in that the player loses interest.

In contrast, according to gaming machine A1, the guide member is provided with a pair of protruding portions that protrude from the guide surface and are formed so as to be able to come into contact with the gaming ball rolling on the guide surface, and the pair of protruding portions are arranged at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the gaming ball that is guided (rolling) on the guide surface can be made to come into contact with the protruding portions, thereby reliably displacing the gaming ball. As a result, the ball can be made to enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In addition, by arranging the pair of protruding parts at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, the game ball entering from one side of the guide member can be made to abut against the protruding parts. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball entering from one side of the guide member from passing through the guide member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance, increasing the player's interest.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged on either side of the ball entrance and rotatably supported at the base end, and the pair of wing members are rotated in a direction that brings the tip ends closer to or farther apart to form a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass through or an open state in which the game ball can pass through, the pair of protrusions protrude from each of the guide surfaces of the pair of wing members, and the protrusion on one of the pair of wing members and the protrusion on the other of the pair of wing members are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed as a pair of wing members arranged on either side of the ball entrance and rotatably supported at the base end, and the pair of protrusions protrude from each guide surface of the pair of wing members, and the protrusions on one of the pair of wing members and the protrusions on the other wing member are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surface can be brought into contact with the protrusions, thereby reliably displacing the game ball. As a result, the ball can be smoothly admitted into the ball entrance and ball clogging can be suppressed.

In addition, by arranging the protruding portion of one feather member and the protruding portion of the other feather member at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface (the direction from the tip side to the base side of the feather member), when a game ball that enters the guide surface of one feather member reaches the guide surface of the other feather member, the game ball can be made to abut against the protruding portion of the other feather member. This makes it possible to prevent a game ball that enters the guide surface of one feather member from passing through the guide surface of the other feather member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance, increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the protruding portion of the gaming machine A2 protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end side of the feather member than to the tip end side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has a protruding portion that protrudes from the guide surface at a position closer to the base end than to the tip end of the blade member, so that an area in which the gaming ball guided by the guide surface can roll before it abuts on the protruding portion can be secured. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the rolling speed of the gaming ball, allowing it to enter the ball entrance smoothly.

In addition, by having the protruding portion protrude from the protruding surface at a position closer to the base end than to the tip end of the blade member, the course of the game ball that has been deflected by contacting the protruding portion can be prevented from returning to the course before the deflection before reaching the ball entrance (the end of the guide surface). In other words, it is possible to easily send the game ball from the guide surface to the ball entrance while keeping it in a deflected state.

A gaming machine A4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A2 or A3, a first region is formed on the guide surface that continues from the tip side to the base side of the feather member, the protrusion is formed with a size that does not abut the gaming ball guided through the first region, and the first region of the guide surface of one of the pair of feather members and the first region of the guide surface of the other feather member are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the gaming ball is guided along the guide surface.

According to gaming machine A4, in gaming machines A2 and A3, a first region that continues from the tip side to the base side of the vane member is formed on the guide surface, and a protrusion is formed with a size that does not abut the gaming ball guided through the first region, so that when the gaming ball that has entered the guide surface rolls through the first region, a decrease in the rolling speed of the gaming ball can be avoided, and the ball can be smoothly entered into the ball entrance.

In this case, the first area of the guide surface of one of the pair of feather members and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member are positioned at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface, so that even if the game ball is simultaneously guided (rolled) through the first area of the guide surface of one feather member and the first area of the guide surface of the other feather member, the game balls can be biased in different directions from each other, allowing them to enter the ball entrance smoothly.

A gaming machine A5 is any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, and is provided with a base member that rotatably supports the feather member, the base member has a restricting portion that abuts against the feather member to restrict the rotation of the feather member, and the protruding portion of the feather member abuts against the restricting portion of the base member.

According to gaming machine A5, in any of gaming machines A2 to A4, a base member is provided that rotatably supports the feather member, and the base member is provided with a restricting portion that restricts the rotation of the feather member by abutting against the feather member, and the protruding portion of the feather member abuts against the restricting portion of the base member, thereby suppressing damage to the feather member. In other words, since the protruding portion is a portion that protrudes from the feather member (guide surface), the relatively rigid portion of the feather member can be used as a stopper that abuts against the restricting portion of the base member, thereby suppressing damage to the feather member.

A gaming machine A5, in which the side of the protrusion is formed to be approximately flush with the side of the base end of the feather member, and in the closed state, the side of the protrusion formed to be approximately flush with the side of the base end of the feather member abuts at least against the regulating portion of the base member. A gaming machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the side of the protruding portion is formed to be approximately flush with the side of the base end side of the feather member, and in the closed state, the side of the protruding portion formed to be approximately flush with the side of the base end side of the feather member at least abuts against the regulating portion of the base member, so that the part far from the rotation axis (the side of the protruding portion) can be abutted against the regulating portion of the base member, and the reaction force input from the regulating portion to the feather member can be reduced. Therefore, damage to the feather member can be suppressed. Also, for example, compared to the case where the protruding tip surface of the protruding portion abuts against the regulating portion of the base member, the regulating portion of the base member can be separated from the ball entrance, and space that serves as a flow path to the ball entrance can be secured. Note that in addition to the side of the protruding portion, the side of the base end side of the feather member may also abut against the regulating portion of the base member. In this case, the surface pressure can be reduced, and damage to the feather member can be further suppressed.

A gaming machine A7 is any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, and is characterized in that it has an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions in the closed state, and the pair of wing members are characterized in that, when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, the opposing distance between the guide surfaces in the area where the protrusions are not formed is larger than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the opposing distance between the protrusions is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

The pair of wing members are positioned so that the distance between the guide surfaces in the closed state is greater than the diameter of the game ball, so as to prevent the game ball from getting caught. In this case, if a protruding portion is protruded from the guide surface, it becomes necessary to space the pair of wing members further apart by the protruding height of the protruding portion, so as to prevent the game ball from getting caught between the protruding portions, and the space required for arranging the pair of wing members increases.

In contrast, gaming machine A7 has the same effects as any of gaming machines A2 to A6, but also has an intervening wall located between the opposing protrusions when closed, and the pair of wing members have a larger distance between the opposing guide surfaces in the area where the protrusions are not formed than the diameter of the gaming ball when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis, and the distance between the opposing protrusions is smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball, thereby reducing the space required for arranging the pair of wing members.

In other words, even if the pair of wing members start to close (start to transition to the closed state) while the game ball is being guided (rolled) on the guide surface, the intervening wall is positioned between the opposing protruding parts, and the game ball is discharged from between the opposing protruding parts, preventing the game ball from being pinched between the protruding parts. The game ball discharged from between the opposing protruding parts by the intervening wall is positioned between the opposing guide surfaces in an area where the protruding parts are not formed, and the opposing distance at this position is made larger than the diameter of the game ball, so the game ball will not be pinched. As a result, the opposing distance between the protruding parts can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball. This makes it possible to reduce the space required for the arrangement of the pair of wing members. In other words, the pair of wing members can be arranged in a space equivalent to the space required for the arrangement of a conventional product that does not have protruding parts on the guide surface.

A gaming machine A8 is characterized in that in the open state of the gaming machine A7, the upper surface of the intervening wall is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the guide surface and higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, gaming machine A8 has an upper surface of the intervening wall that, in the open state, is located lower in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the guiding surface and higher in the direction of gravity than the lower end of the ball entrance opening, so that a gaming ball guided by the guiding surface can be sent to the upper surface of the intervening wall, and can be made to enter the ball entrance opening by rolling the upper surface of the intervening wall.

A gaming machine A9 is any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, characterized in that the timing at which one of the pair of wing members is placed in a position to form the closed state differs from the timing at which the other wing member is placed in a position to form the closed state.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A8, gaming machine A9 has a different timing for one of the pair of wing members to be positioned to form the closed state from the timing for the other wing member to be positioned to form the closed state, making it difficult for a gaming ball to become caught between the pair of wing members (guide surfaces), and therefore making it possible to narrow the distance between the pair of wing members. This reduces the space required for arranging the pair of wing members.

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed to be rotatable between a closed position in which the guide surface faces the ball entrance, preventing the ball from entering the ball entrance, and an open position in which the guide surface faces upward and protrudes toward the front side of the ball entrance, allowing the ball to enter the ball entrance when it rolls along the guide surface; the guide surface of the guide member is formed to have a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance; and the pair of protruding portions are disposed on either side of the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are disposed at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the ball is guided along the guide surface).

In the gaming machine A1, the guide member is formed so as to be able to slide between a closed position in which it is recessed below the ball inlet, preventing the ball from entering the ball inlet, and an open position in which it juts out toward the front side of the ball inlet with the guide surface facing upward, allowing the ball to enter the ball inlet when rolling along the guide surface; the guide surface of the guide member is formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball inlet; and the pair of protruding portions are disposed at positions sandwiching the ball inlet when viewed from the front, and are disposed at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the ball is guided along the guide surface).

According to gaming machine A10 or A11, in addition to the effect of gaming machine A1, the guide member has a guide surface formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the ball entrance, and the pair of protrusions are disposed on either side of the ball entrance when viewed from the front, and are disposed at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface), so that the game ball guided (rolling) along the guide surface can be reliably deflected by abutting the protrusions. As a result, the ball can be smoothly admitted into the ball entrance.

In addition, by arranging one protruding portion and the other protruding portion at different positions in a direction perpendicular to the width direction of the guide member (the direction in which the game ball is guided along the guide surface), when a game ball enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction, the game ball can be made to abut against one of the pair of protruding portions. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game ball that enters the guide surface of the guide member from one side (or the other side) in the width direction from passing through the guide surface of the guide member and flowing out from the other side in the width direction of the guide surface of the guide member. As a result, the game ball can be made to enter the ball entrance, increasing the player's interest.

<Concept of the invention using the winning port unit 500 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising an entrance opening formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, a pair of wing members arranged on either side of the entrance opening, a drive means for applying a drive force to the pair of wing members to open or close them, and a regulating means which, when the pair of wing members are opened by the drive force of the drive means, is positioned at an allowable position that allows the entrance of the gaming ball into the entrance opening, and which, when the pair of wing members are closed by the drive force of the drive means, is positioned at a regulating position that regulates the entry of the gaming ball into the entrance opening, characterized in that the regulating means is formed so that it can be maintained in the regulating position when the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are open from the outside.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes an entrance opening formed to allow game balls to enter, a pair of wing members arranged on either side of the entrance opening, a drive means that applies a drive force to the pair of wing members to open or close them, and a restricting means that, when the pair of wing members are opened by the drive force of the drive means, is positioned at an allowable position that allows the game ball to enter the entrance opening, and, when the pair of wing members are closed by the drive force of the drive means, is positioned at a restricting position that restricts the game ball from entering the entrance opening (for example, JP 2011-172833 A).

According to this gaming machine, when the pair of feather members are opened by the driving force of the drive means, the restricting means is positioned in a permissive position, allowing a gaming ball that has passed between the pair of feather members to enter the ball entrance. On the other hand, when the pair of feather members are closed by the driving force of the drive means, the restricting means is positioned in a restricting position, so that if the pair of feather members are forcibly opened from the outside, the gaming ball can be restricted from entering the ball entrance.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the displacement of the restricting means is not restricted. For example, the restricting means can be displaced from the restricting position to the permissible position by forcibly opening a pair of blade members from the outside. This creates a problem in that the effect of restricting the illegal entry of game balls into the ball entry opening is insufficient.

In contrast, according to gaming machine B1, the arrangement of the restricting means is formed so that it can be maintained in the restricting position when the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are open from the outside, so that the restricting means can be prevented from being displaced to the permissible position. This makes it easier to restrict the illegal entry of game balls into the ball entry opening.

The purpose of the restriction position that restricts the entry of game balls into the ball entry opening is that it is sufficient to stop the game ball at a specified position. In other words, when there is a ball entry opening and a passageway that is connected to the ball entry opening and through which the game balls that flow in from the ball entry opening pass, the restriction position set by the restriction means (the position where the game balls are stopped) may be upstream of the ball entry opening or downstream of the ball entry opening (i.e., midway along the path from the ball entry opening through the passageway). In the latter case, the restriction position set by the restriction means may be upstream of the detection means (detection sensor) that is arranged midway through the passageway to detect the passage of the game ball, or may be downstream of the detection means.

A gaming machine B1, comprising a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism comprising a slide transmission member which is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means, and a rotation transmission member which is rotated to an open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position to open the pair of wing members and rotated to a closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members, the restriction means being disposed on the slide transmission member, the restriction means being disposed in an allowable position when the slide transmission member is slidably displaced to the open slide position, and the restriction means being disposed in a restricted position when the slide transmission member is slidably displaced to the closed slide position, and when the rotation transmission member is disposed in the open rotation position with the slide transmission member disposed in the closed slide position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby restricting the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 has the following advantages: when the slide transmission member is in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is in the open rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, restricting the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position, making it easier to restrict illegal entry of game balls into the ball entry opening.

In other words, if the pair of closed wing members is forcibly opened illegally from the outside, the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position with the slide transmission member in the closed slide position. In this state, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict the slide displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position, so that the restricting means can be maintained in the restricting position (the restricting means can be prevented from being forcibly displaced illegally from the outside to the permitted position). As a result, even if the pair of wing members is forcibly opened from the outside and a game ball is passed between the pair of wing members, the restricting means can restrict the game ball from entering the ball entrance.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that in gaming machine B2, a sliding groove is extended on one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding protrusion is protruded from the other, and the sliding protrusion slides along the sliding groove to transmit the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member and rotate the rotation transmission member, and the sliding protrusion engages with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove to restrict the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine B2, a sliding groove is extended on one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member, and a sliding protrusion is protruded from the other, and the sliding protrusion slides along the sliding groove to transmit the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member and rotate the rotation transmission member, and the sliding protrusion engages with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove to restrict the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position, making it possible to reduce the size while making it difficult to release the restriction.

In other words, a means for restricting the sliding displacement of the sliding transmission member to the open slide position can be formed by utilizing the sliding groove and sliding protrusion for transmitting the sliding displacement of the sliding transmission member to the rotation transmission member to rotate it, and since it is not necessary to provide such a means separately in another location, it is possible to achieve a correspondingly smaller size. In addition, by using a structure in which the sliding protrusion engages with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove, it is possible to make unauthorized access to such an engaged portion from the outside difficult, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult to release the restriction (engagement).

A gaming machine B1, comprising a transmission mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism comprising a slide transmission member which is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the drive means, and a rotation transmission member which is rotated to an open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position to open the pair of wing members and rotated to a closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position to at least close the pair of wing members, the restriction means being disposed on the rotation transmission member, the restriction means being disposed in an allowable position when the rotation transmission member is rotated to the open rotation position, and the restriction means being disposed in a restricted position when the rotation transmission member is rotated to the closed rotation position, and when the slide transmission member is disposed in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is disposed in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other to restrict the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B4 has the following advantages: when the slide transmission member is positioned in the closed slide position and the rotation transmission member is positioned in the closed rotation position, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, restricting the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position, making it easier to restrict illegal entry of game balls into the ball entry opening.

In other words, even if, for example, an attempt is made to forcibly open the pair of wing members from the outside when the pair of wing members are closed, or to rotate the rotation transmission member to the open position by directly operating the rotation transmission member, the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member are engaged to restrict rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position, so that the restricting means can be maintained in the restricting position (i.e., the restricting means can be prevented from being forcibly displaced from the outside to the permitted position). As a result, the restricting means can restrict game balls from being illegally inserted into the ball entrance.

Gaming machine B5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B4, it has a protruding portion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engaging portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protruding portion, and the protruding portion protrudes along the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member.

Gaming machine B5 has the same effects as gaming machine B4, but also includes a protrusion protruding from one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member, and an engagement portion formed on the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member so as to be engageable with the protrusion. The protrusion protrudes in the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member, so that the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member can be used to switch between engagement and disengagement at the protrusion and the engagement portion, thereby simplifying the structure.

The engagement portion may be a surface against which the protrusion can come into contact (the outer surface of the other of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member), or it may be a hole or recess into which the protrusion can be inserted (a hole drilled or a recess formed in one of the slide transmission member or the rotation transmission member). In other words, it is sufficient if the protrusion can come into contact with the engagement portion to restrict the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position. In this case, it is preferable to make the engagement portion a hole or a recess. This is because the space required for the protrusion to be inserted into the engagement portion can be reduced, allowing for miniaturization, and the protrusion can be shielded from the outside by being inserted into the engagement portion, making it difficult to illegally access the protrusion from the outside.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the rotation transmission member in the gaming machine B4 or B5 has an opening side abutment portion that abuts against the pair of wing members to open them when rotated toward the opening rotation position, and a closing side abutment portion that abuts against the pair of wing members to close them when rotated toward the closing rotation position.

According to gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of gaming machines B4 and B5, the rotation transmission member has an opening side abutment portion that abuts against the pair of wing members to open them when rotated toward the open rotation position, and a closing side abutment portion that abuts against the pair of wing members to close them when rotated toward the closed rotation position, so that the pair of wing members can be prevented from being forcibly opened illegally from the outside, and unauthorized access to the rotation transmission member or slide transmission member from the outside can be made difficult.

That is, when the wing members are displaced from the outside in the forced opening direction, the closing side abutment portion of the rotation transmission member is pressed by the wing members, which tries to rotate the rotation transmission member toward the open rotation position. In this case, according to the present invention, the rotation of the rotation transmission member to the open rotation position can be restricted by the engagement between the rotation transmission member and the slide transmission member, so that the displacement of the wing members can be restricted by the closing side abutment portion of the rotation transmission member. In other words, the wing members can be restricted from being displaced from the outside in the forced opening direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pair of wing members from being illegally forced open from the outside, and it is possible to make it difficult for illegal access to the rotation transmission member or slide transmission member from the outside.

Gaming machine B7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B4 or B5, it has a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, the rotation transmission member has an opening side abutment portion that abuts against the pair of wing members to open them when rotated toward the open rotation position, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means.

Gaming machine B7 has the same effects as gaming machines B4 and B5, but also includes a biasing means for biasing the pair of wing members in the closing direction, and the rotation transmission member has an opening side abutment portion that abuts against the pair of wing members to open them when rotated toward the open rotation position, and when the rotation transmission member is rotated toward the closed rotation position, the pair of wing members are closed by the biasing force of the biasing means. Therefore, when the pair of wing members are illegally forcibly opened from the outside, the pair of wing members do not abut against the rotation transmission member, and it is possible to prevent the external force caused by such forced opening from acting on the rotation transmission member. As a result, it is possible to prevent damage to the pair of wing members, the rotation transmission member, or the slide transmission member.

Examples of the biasing means include a spring (torsion spring or coil spring) that biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction by elastic recovery force, and a magnet that biases the pair of wing members in the closing direction by adhesive force.

Gaming machine B8 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B7, and is provided with a detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the restriction means is characterized in that the restriction position is downstream of the detection means and restricts the gaming ball at a position where it can be detected by the detection means.

According to gaming machine B8, any of gaming machines B1 to B7 is provided with a detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the ball entrance, and the restriction means has a restriction position downstream of the detection means and restricts the gaming ball at a position where it can be detected by the detection means. Therefore, for example, if the blade member is forcibly opened and a gaming ball is illegally admitted through the ball entrance, the detection means can continue to detect the gaming ball. Therefore, by determining whether detection by the detection means has continued for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to detect that a gaming ball has been illegally admitted.

<Concept of the invention using decorative pattern display device 800 as an example>
A gaming machine C1 having a rotatable first reel and a rotatable second reel arranged approximately concentrically inside the first reel, wherein the first reel has a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape and a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall, and the second reel has a second outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape and an outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined distance, and a second side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall and an outer surface of the second side wall facing the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined distance, and an upright portion is provided from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall toward the other.

Here, a gaming machine is known that has a first reel that is rotatable and a second reel that is arranged approximately concentrically inside the first reel and is also rotatable (i.e., has a dual reel structure) (for example, JP 2003-230693 A). Also known is a technology that removes dust from the display surface of the reel by contacting a rotating brush with the outer periphery (display surface) of the reel and moving the rotating member in response to the rotation of the reel (for example, JP 2009-28241 A).

However, the dual reel structure has the problem that cleaning is difficult. In other words, with a dual reel structure, there is no space between the outer reel (first reel) and the inner reel (second reel) to place the above-mentioned rotating brush, so it is not possible to clean the inner surface of the outer reel or the outer surface of the inner reel (second reel).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine C1, the first reel includes a first outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape and a first side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the first outer peripheral wall, and the second reel includes a second outer peripheral wall formed in a cylindrical shape and having an outer surface facing the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall at a predetermined distance, and a second side wall extending radially inward from one axial side of the second outer peripheral wall and having an outer surface facing the inner surface of the first side wall at a predetermined distance, and a standing portion is erected from at least one of the inner surface of the first side wall or the outer surface of the second side wall to the other, so that the standing portion is displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to generate wind pressure, and the air can be made to flow between the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall by using the wind pressure. This allows dust to be removed by the air flow, and the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be cleaned. In other words, the dual reel structure makes cleaning easier.

A gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have a surface that is continuous in the circumferential direction in the gaming machine C1.

If an opening is formed in at least one of the first side wall or the second side wall, or if a portion of the wall in the circumferential direction is partially divided, the wind pressure generated by the vertical portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall will escape through the opening or divided portion, weakening the wind pressure and making it more difficult to move air between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall.

In contrast, according to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, the first side wall and the second side wall are formed in an annular shape when viewed in the axial direction and have surfaces that are continuous in the circumferential direction, so that the wind pressure generated by the erected portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be increased. Therefore, it is easier to make the air flow between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall. As a result, it is easier to make the air flow between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the erected portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1 or C2, the first reel is rotatably supported at the center and has a first support wall that supports the first side wall, and the second reel is rotatably supported at the center and has a second support wall that supports the second side wall, and an opening is formed in at least one of the first support wall or the second support wall.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 and C2, an opening is formed in at least one of the support wall supporting the first side wall or the second support wall supporting the second side wall, so that air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be exhausted to the outside through the opening, or air can be sucked in from the outside between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall. That is, the air flow resistance is reduced, and the air between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall can be made to flow (flow out or flow in) accordingly. As a result, the air can be made to flow easily between the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall by utilizing the wind pressure generated by the vertical portion being displaced in the circumferential direction between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C3, when the erected portion is erected on the first side wall or the second side wall of one of the first reel or the second reel, the opening is at least formed on the first support wall or the second support wall of the other of the first reel or the second reel.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of gaming machine C3, when an upright portion is provided on the first side wall or second side wall of one of the first reel or second reel, an opening is at least formed on the first support wall or second support wall of the other of the first reel or second reel, so that it is easier to achieve the effect of reducing flow resistance by exhausting or sucking in air through the opening. In other words, by stopping the other reel on which the opening is formed while rotating one of the first reel and the second reel on which the upright portion is provided, the resistance to the flow of air (exhaust or suck) through the opening can be reduced.

A gaming machine C5 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C4, characterized in that the erected portions are erected at different radial positions on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall.

In gaming machine C5, in any of gaming machines C1 to C4, the erected portions are erected at different radial positions on the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall, so that regardless of whether the first reel or the second reel is rotating, the erected portions can be displaced circumferentially between the inner surface of the first side wall and the outer surface of the second side wall to generate wind pressure. Therefore, in the performance caused by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel, the opportunities to clean the inner surface of the first outer wall and the outer surface of the second outer wall can be increased.

A gaming machine C6 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C5, characterized in that at least a portion of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to be optically transparent, a plurality of symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel, and the upright portion is erected on the second side wall of the second reel.

According to gaming machine C6, in any of gaming machines C1 to C5, at least a portion of the first outer peripheral wall of the first reel is formed to be optically transparent, and multiple symbols are arranged in the circumferential direction on the second outer peripheral wall of the second reel, so that the player can visually see the change in the symbols accompanying the rotation of the second reel through the first reel. In this case, the standing portion is set upright on the second side wall of the second reel, that is, the standing portion is set upright on the second side wall of the second reel, which is rotated more times than the first reel, so that the opportunity to clean the inner surface of the first outer peripheral wall and the outer surface of the second outer peripheral wall can be increased in the performance caused by the rotation of the first reel or the second reel.

<Concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
Gaming machine D1 comprises a substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted, and a transparent member that transmits light emitted from the light-emitting means, the transparent member being formed curved and the plurality of light-emitting means being arranged along the curvature of the transparent member, characterized in that the plurality of light-emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a substrate on which multiple light-emitting means are mounted and a transparent member that transmits light emitted from the light-emitting means, the transparent member being curved, and the multiple light-emitting means being arranged along the curvature of the transparent member (for example, JP 2013-106672 A). In this case, the multiple light-emitting means are arranged so as to be equally spaced when viewed from the front of the transparent member. That is, the multiple light-emitting means are equally spaced along the direction of a line segment (chord) connecting both ends of a curved line (arc) formed by the multiple light-emitting means. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the spacing between adjacent light-emitting means in some of the multiple light-emitting means is narrowed, which causes a problem of uneven distribution of heat generated by the light-emitting means. As a result, heat is concentrated in some of the light-emitting means, which is likely to shorten the lifespan.

In contrast, with gaming machine D1, multiple light-emitting means are arranged at approximately equal intervals in the circumferential direction, so the interval between adjacent light-emitting means can be made constant for each light-emitting means, and the distribution of heat emitted by the light-emitting means can be made uniform. As a result, the concentration of heat in some light-emitting means can be suppressed, and the lifespan of each light-emitting means can be improved.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, a reflective member is provided that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transparent member, the reflective member has a plurality of partitioned surfaces that correspond to the plurality of light emitting means, and the partition widths of the plurality of partitioned surfaces are set to be approximately the same when viewed from the front of the transparent member.

When multiple light-emitting means are arranged at equal intervals (i.e., at equal intervals in the circumferential direction) along the curvature of the transparent member, the multiple light-emitting means are arranged at unequal intervals when viewed from the front of the transparent member. In other words, when viewed from the front of the transparent member, there are areas where the distance between the light-emitting means is narrow and areas where it is wide. This results in a non-uniform distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the multiple light-emitting means.

In contrast, gaming machine D2 has the same effects as gaming machine D1, but also includes a reflecting member that reflects light emitted from the light emitting means toward the transparent member, and the reflecting member includes a plurality of partitioned surfaces that correspond to the plurality of light emitting means. The partitioned widths of the plurality of partitioned surfaces are set to be approximately the same when viewed from the front of the transparent member, so that the amount of light seen on each partitioned surface when viewed from the front of the transparent member can be approximately the same. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light along the arrangement direction of the plurality of light emitting means can be made uniform.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front in gaming machine D2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D2, gaming machine D3 has a light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means that is rectangular when viewed from the front. This ensures light diffusion (light can be emitted at a wider angle) compared to, for example, a circular light-emitting surface, and therefore makes it possible to uniformly distribute the amount of light in one section of the screen.

The light-emitting surface refers to the front surface of the encapsulating resin that encapsulates the LED chip. Therefore, when the light-emitting surface is rectangular in front view, this means that the shape of the encapsulating resin in front view (the shape of the internal space of the reflector surrounding the encapsulating resin in front view) is rectangular.

Gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D3, at least some of the multiple light-emitting means are arranged in a direction such that one side of the light-emitting surface is aligned along the tangent direction of the curved shape of the transparent member.

In gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D3, at least some of the multiple light-emitting means are arranged with one side of the light-emitting surface aligned along the tangent direction of the curved shape of the transparent member, making it easier to uniformly diffuse the light emitted from the light-emitting means along the curve of the transparent member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light visible through the transparent member can be made uniform.

Amusement machine D5 is any one of gaming machines D2 to D4, characterized in that the partition surface faces the back surface of the transparent member and is formed as a curved surface that is concave on the side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means faces the opposing space between the transparent member and the partition surface.

According to gaming machine D5, in any of gaming machines D2 to D4, the partition surface faces the back surface of the transparent member and is formed as a curved surface that is concave on the side away from the back surface of the transparent member, and the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means faces the space between the transparent member and the partition surface, so that the substrate can be arranged in a position perpendicular to the transparent member. In other words, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the unit consisting of the transparent member, substrate, and reflecting member can be increased. In this case, the partition surface is arranged in a manner that surrounds the periphery of the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means from a direction perpendicular to the traveling direction of the light, so that the light reflected by the partition surface can be made to uniformly enter the back surface of the transparent member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light visible through the transparent member can be made uniform.

In gaming machine D5, the reflecting member has a connecting surface that is connected to the partition surface and faces the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means, and the connecting surface is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light-emitting surface of the light-emitting means. Gaming machine D6.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, the reflective member is connected to the partition surface and has a connecting surface facing the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, and the connecting surface is formed as a curved surface that is convex toward the light emitting surface of the light emitting means, so that the light reflected from the connecting surface can be made to uniformly enter the back surface of the transparent member. As a result, the distribution of the amount of light visible through the transparent member can be made uniform.

<Concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
Gaming machine E1 comprises a reel which is formed to be rotatable and which is arranged in parallel at a predetermined interval, a decorative member which is arranged between the reels and at least a portion of which is optically transparent, and a base which is arranged on the rear side of the decorative member and on which a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted, the base being arranged in an orientation in which the surface on which the light-emitting means are mounted is approximately perpendicular to the rear side of the decorative member, and is characterized in that the gaming machine further comprises a reflective member which reflects light emitted from the light-emitting means to the rear side of the decorative member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a reel that is rotatable and is arranged with a predetermined distance between the reels, a decorative member that is arranged between the reels and has at least a portion that is light-transmitting, and a board that is arranged on the back side of the decorative member and has a plurality of light-emitting means mounted thereon, the board being arranged with the surface on which the light-emitting means are mounted being approximately perpendicular to the back side of the decorative member (for example, JP 2013-5927 A). This gaming machine not only can block the space between the reels from the player with the decorative member, but also can form (display) a pattern on the surface of the decorative member with the light from the light-emitting means that passes through the decorative member, allowing the player to view the pattern on the decorative member together with the pattern displayed on the outer periphery of the reel.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the board is arranged with the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, so the light emitted from the light-emitting means cannot be sufficiently irradiated onto the back surface of the decorative member, and the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means cannot be made large enough. This causes the problem of insufficient presentation effect. On the other hand, if the pattern formed (displayed) by the light from the light-emitting means is kept small and the decorative member (area excluding the pattern) is made large, the sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel is impaired.

In contrast, gaming machine E1 is equipped with a reflective member that reflects the light emitted from the light-emitting means to the back surface of the decorative member, so even if the board is arranged in an orientation in which the surface on which the light-emitting means is mounted is perpendicular to the back surface of the decorative member, the range of illumination of the back surface of the decorative member by the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be widened. This allows the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light-emitting means to be larger, enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, since the pattern formed (displayed) by the light of the light-emitting means can be larger, the area excluding the pattern can be made smaller, creating a sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel.

Gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the decorative member in gaming machine E1 is located on the front side of the outer periphery of the reel and is formed by extending the outer edge to a position overlapping the outer periphery of the reel when viewed from the front.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 has a decorative member that is positioned closer to the front than the outer circumferential surface of the reel, and extends its outer edge to a position that overlaps with the outer circumferential surface of the reel when viewed from the front, making it easier to shield (make difficult to see) the axial end face of the reel from the player. Also, the pattern of the decorative member formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light-emitting means and the pattern displayed on the outer circumferential surface of the reel can be brought closer together, making it easier to create a sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel.

In gaming machine E2, the reflecting member connects the surface of the board on which the light-emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby surrounding the area on the board on which the light-emitting means is mounted and the area on the decorative member on which the pattern is formed, and the back surface of the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the reel as it moves from the decorative member to the board. In gaming machine E3, the reflecting member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the reel as it moves from the decorative member to the board.

According to gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, the reflective member connects the surface of the board on which the light-emitting means is mounted and the back surface of the decorative member, thereby surrounding the area on the board on which the light-emitting means is mounted and the area on the decorative member on which the pattern is formed, and the back surface of the reflective member is inclined in a direction away from the axial end surface of the reel as it moves from the decorative member to the board. This ensures the size of the pattern formed (displayed) by the light emitted from the light-emitting means, while allowing the back surface of the decorative member to be close to the outer peripheral surface of the reel and the reel to be inserted into the back side of the back surface of the decorative member (bringing the reel close to the board). As a result, it is possible to easily shield (make difficult to see) the axial end surface of the reel from the player, and also to easily create a sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the light-emitting means is mounted on both one side and the other side of the board in gaming machine E2 or E3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E2 and E3, gaming machine E4 has the light-emitting means mounted on both sides of the board, so that different patterns can be formed (displayed) independently on the decorative member using the light emitted from the light-emitting means mounted on one side and the light emitted from the light-emitting means mounted on the other side.

In this case, the number of boards arranged between the reels arranged side by side can be reduced to one. This reduces the space required for arranging the board, allowing the reel to be inserted deeper into the back of the decorative member (bringing the reel closer to the board). As a result, it is easier to shield the axial end face of the reel from the player (making it harder to see), and it is easier to create a sense of unity between the decorative member and the reel.

<Concept of the invention using the segment display device 600 as an example>
A gaming machine F1 is provided with a first displacement member and a second displacement member arranged opposite each other and formed so as to be displaceable in a direction approaching or separating each other, and formed so as to be displaceable in the same direction with their opposing edges abutting each other, the gaming machine F1 is provided with a base member, and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism which displaceably support the first displacement member and the second displacement member on the base member, respectively, and the support manner of the first support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing edges of the first displacement member, and the support manner of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing edges of the second displacement member that is opposite to the other side of the opposing edges of the second displacement member that abuts against one side of the opposing edges of the first displacement member.

Here, a gaming machine is known that includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member that are arranged opposite each other and are formed so that they can be displaced in the direction of approaching or separating, and that can be displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other (for example, JP 2013-106844 A). According to this gaming machine, by bringing the first displacement member and the second displacement member close to the position where their opposing sides are in contact with each other, it is possible to shield an object (for example, a liquid crystal display device or a performance member) located on the back side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in a direction away from each other, it is possible to release the shielding as the displacement moves away from each other, and to perform a performance that makes the object visible. In addition, by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member in the same direction (for example, reciprocating in one direction and the other direction) with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is possible to perform a performance before the shielding of the object is released (a performance that draws attention to the operation of releasing the shielding) while maintaining the shielding of the object.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, due to dimensional tolerances and assembly tolerances of the components, it is difficult to bring the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members into close contact with each other, and there is a risk of a gap forming between the opposing edges. If a gap forms between the opposing edges, the player can see the object on the rear side through the gap, impeding the presentation effect.

In contrast, the gaming machine F1 includes a base member and a first support mechanism and a second support mechanism that support the first and second displacement members on the base member so that they can be displaced, respectively. The support mode of the first support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member, and the support mode of the second support mechanism is biased toward one side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that is opposite to the other side of the opposing side of the second displacement member that abuts against the one side of the opposing side of the first displacement member. Therefore, when the opposing sides of the first and second displacement members abut against each other, the support mode of the first support mechanism and the support mode of the second support mechanism can be biased toward opposite sides (sides rotated 180° around the center of the one and other sides of the opposing sides). This makes it easier to bring the opposing sides of the first and second displacement members into close contact with each other, and prevents gaps from being formed between the opposing sides.

Examples of the manner in which the support state is biased to one side include those in which the rigidity of the components on one side and the other side (the dimensions of the components, the number of components arranged, the material, etc.) is different, those in which the driving force transmitted on one side and the other side (for example, the magnitude, transmission time, transmission timing, etc.) is different, those in which the connection state between the components on one side and the other side (for example, the number of connecting parts, the amount of rattle of the connecting parts, etc.) is different, those in which the ease of displacement toward the other side (the biasing force received from the biasing means, gravity, resistance during displacement (sliding or rotating), etc.) is different on one side and the other side, and combinations of these.

Therefore, when the support state is biased to one side due to the rigidity of the constituent members, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism can face their high rigidity side (low rigidity side) to the low rigidity side (high rigidity side) of the other. Therefore, when the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members are in contact with each other, the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism can each push the other (move forward) on the high rigidity side, and receive the other (move backward) on the low rigidity side. As a result, the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of a gap between the opposing edges can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means for generating a drive force, a pair of first connecting members for connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member that transmit the drive force of the first drive means to the pair of first connecting members, respectively, and have different configurations. The second support mechanism includes a second drive means for generating a drive force, a pair of second connecting members for connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member that transmit the drive force of the second drive means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively, and have different configurations. The gaming machine F2.

According to gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means that generates a drive force, a pair of first connecting members that connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side transmission member and a first other-side transmission member that transmit the drive force of the first drive means to the pair of first connecting members, respectively, and have different configurations. The second support mechanism includes a second drive means that generates a drive force, a pair of second connecting members that connect the second displacement member to the base member, and a second one-side transmission member and a second other-side transmission member that transmit the drive force of the second drive means to the pair of second connecting members, respectively, and have different configurations. This makes it easier to bring the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member into close contact with each other, and prevents gaps from being formed between the opposing sides.

In other words, when the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members are in contact with each other, each of the first and second support mechanisms can, for example, push the other (move forward) on the side with the larger driving force or the side with the earlier timing of the transmission of the driving force, while accepting the other (move backward) on the side with the smaller driving force or the side with the later timing of the transmission of the driving force. As a result, the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and the formation of gaps between the opposing edges can be suppressed.

Here, examples of configurations in which the first one-side transmission member and the first other-side transmission means (the second one-side transmission member and the second other-side transmission means) are different from each other include configurations in which the rigidity of the components is different (the dimensions of the components, the number of components arranged, the material, etc.), configurations in which the connection states between the components are different (for example, the number of connecting parts, the amount of play in the connecting parts, etc.), and combinations of these. In other words, due to these differences in configuration, the magnitude of the driving force to be transmitted and the timing of transmission differ, and the support modes of the first support mechanism and the second support mechanism are each biased to one side.

In the gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to have approximately the same length, one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, and the other end side is supported coaxially and rotatably on the base member. In the gaming machine F3,

In gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F2, the first connecting member and the second connecting member are formed to be approximately the same length, and one end side is connected to the first displacement member or the second displacement member, while the other end side is coaxially rotatably supported by the base member. Therefore, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is easy to maintain the state in which the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the bias of the support mode is utilized.

A gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F3, an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member or the second connecting member, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in contact with each other at their opposing edges, the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state.

According to gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F3, an elastic body made of a rubber-like elastic material is disposed on at least one of the first connecting member or the second connecting member, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in a state where their opposing sides are in contact with each other, the elastic body is interposed between the first connecting member and the second connecting member in an elastically compressed state. Therefore, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocated in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact with each other, it is easy to maintain the state where the opposing sides are in contact with each other even when the bias of the support mode is utilized.

A gaming machine F5, in which the first support mechanism includes a first drive means for generating a drive force, a pair of first connecting members that are driven by the first drive means and connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side urging member and a first other-side urging member that apply different urging forces to the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism includes a second drive means for generating a drive force, a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second drive means and connect the second displacement member to the base member, and a second one-side urging member and a second other-side urging member that apply different urging forces to the pair of second connecting members.

According to gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of any one of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means that generates a drive force, a pair of first connecting members that are driven by the first drive means and connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a first one-side urging member and a first other-side urging member that apply different urging forces to the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism includes a second drive means that generates a drive force, a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second drive means and connect the second displacement member to the base member, and a second one-side urging member and a second other-side urging member that apply different urging forces to the pair of second connecting members, so that the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In other words, when the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members are in contact with each other, each of the first and second support mechanisms can, for example, push the other (move forward) on the side with the larger biasing force, while accepting the other (move backward) on the side with the smaller biasing force. As a result, the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and gaps can be prevented from being formed between the opposing edges.

The first one-side urging member and the first other-side urging member may have the same configuration. That is, the positions at which the urging force is applied may be different from each other, or the amounts of elastic deformation may be different from each other, so that the urging forces applied to the pair of first connecting members may be different. The same applies to the second one-side urging member and the second other-side urging member.

A gaming machine F6, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, is characterized in that the first support mechanism includes a first drive means for generating a drive force, a pair of first connecting members driven by the first drive means and connecting the first displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism includes a second drive means for generating a drive force, a pair of second connecting members driven by the second drive means and connecting the second displacement member to the base member, and a second biasing member for applying a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members.

According to gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines F1 to F4, the first support mechanism includes a first drive means that generates a drive force, a pair of first connecting members that are driven by the first drive means and connect the first displacement member to the base member, and a first biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of first connecting members, and the second support mechanism includes a second drive means that generates a drive force, a pair of second connecting members that are driven by the second drive means and connect the second displacement member to the base member, and a second biasing member that applies a biasing force to one of the pair of second connecting members, so that the opposing sides of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be easily brought into close contact with each other and the formation of a gap between the opposing sides can be suppressed.

In other words, when the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members are in contact with each other, each of the first and second support mechanisms can, for example, push the other (move forward) on the side on which the biasing force is applied, and receive the other (move backward) on the side on which the biasing force is not applied. As a result, the opposing edges of the first and second displacement members can be easily brought into close contact with each other, and gaps can be prevented from being formed between the opposing edges.

A gaming machine F7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F3 or F4, a first torsion spring is provided, the first torsion spring being formed as a torsion spring with one leg connected to the first connecting member and the other leg connected to the base member, and applying a biasing force in a direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, and at least one of the connection position between the one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the connection position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is moved away from the winding portion as the first connecting member is rotated in the direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member.

According to gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F3 or F4, the first torsion spring is formed as a torsion spring, one leg of which is connected to the first connecting member and the other leg of which is connected to the base member, and which applies a biasing force in a direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member. Therefore, when displacing the first displacement member in a direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, the driving force of the first drive means required to rotate the first connecting member can be assisted by the biasing force of the first torsion spring. Therefore, for example, when displacing the first displacement member from a stopped state from a retracted position away from the second displacement member to an abutting position where the first displacement member abuts against the second displacement member, the start of the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the first connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member, at least one of the connecting position between one leg of the first torsion spring and the first connecting member or the connecting position between the other leg of the first torsion spring and the base member is moved away from the winding part, so that the biasing force in the direction that brings the first displacement member closer to the second displacement member can be weakened by the amount that the distance from the winding part to the position where the force acts becomes longer. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member that has been brought closer to the second displacement member is stopped, the displacement can be stopped reliably, so damage due to collision can be suppressed. In addition, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with the opposing sides abutting against each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be increased, improving the presentation effect.

A gaming machine F7 is provided with a second torsion spring formed as a torsion spring with one leg connected to the second connecting member and the other leg connected to the base member, the second torsion spring applying a biasing force in a direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, and the gaming machine F8 is characterized in that as the second connecting member is rotated in the direction to bring the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, at least one of the connection position between the one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is moved away from the winding portion.

According to gaming machine F8, the second torsion spring has the same effect as the first torsion spring in gaming machine F7. This is particularly effective when the first and second displacement members are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides in contact, because the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed in both members. Furthermore, the configuration of gaming machine F8 is particularly effective when the first and second displacement members are at the same height (positioned in the gravity direction), the position where they abut is the highest position (or lowest position) in the gravity direction, and the position where they are separated (retracted position) is the lowest position (or highest position) in the gravity direction.

A gaming machine F9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine F7, the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member by being displaced upward in the direction of gravity.

According to gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F7, the first displacement member is moved closer to the second displacement member by being displaced upward in the direction of gravity, so the further downward the first displacement member is positioned in the direction of gravity, the stronger the urging force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity (i.e., the further upward the first displacement member is positioned in the direction of gravity, the weaker the urging force in the direction of displacing the first displacement member upward in the direction of gravity).

Therefore, when the first displacement member is displaced (raised) from a stopped state upward in the direction of gravity, the displacement (raising) can be started smoothly, and when the raised first displacement member is stopped, the displacement can be stopped reliably not only by the action of gravity but also by weakening the biasing force. As a result, damage due to collision with the second displacement member can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the first displacement member that has been displaced (lowered) downward in the direction of gravity is stopped, the biasing force is strengthened, so that the biasing force can counter the action of gravity that tries to continue the descent. As a result, the first displacement member can be stopped reliably.

A gaming machine F9 is provided with a second torsion spring formed as a torsion spring, one leg of which is connected to the second connecting member and the other leg of which is connected to the base member, and which applies a biasing force in a direction that moves the second displacement member away from the first displacement member, and the second displacement member is moved away from the first displacement member by being displaced upward in the direction of gravity, and at least one of the connection position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the connection position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is moved away from the winding portion as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that moves the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member. A gaming machine F10 is characterized in that:

According to gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F9, a second torsion spring is provided, one leg of which is connected to a second connecting member and the other leg of which is connected to a base member, and which applies a biasing force in a direction that moves the second displacement member away from the first displacement member. Since the second displacement member is separated from the first displacement member by being displaced upward in the direction of gravity, when the second displacement member is displaced in a direction that moves it away from the first displacement member, that is, when it is necessary to displace (raise) the second displacement member against the direction of gravity, the driving force of the second drive means required to rotate the first connection member can be assisted by the biasing force of the second torsion spring. Therefore, the displacement can be performed smoothly.

In this case, as the second connecting member is rotated in a direction that brings the second displacement member closer to the first displacement member, at least one of the connecting position between one leg of the second torsion spring and the second connecting member or the connecting position between the other leg of the second torsion spring and the base member is moved away from the winding portion, so that the distance from the winding portion to the position where the force acts is longer, and the biasing force in the direction that moves the second displacement member away from the first displacement member (the direction that moves the second displacement member upward in the direction of gravity) can be weakened. Therefore, for example, when the first displacement member and the second displacement member are reciprocally displaced in the same direction with their opposing sides abutting against each other, the driving force required for the reciprocating displacement can be suppressed, so that the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement can be increased, improving the presentation effect.

Gaming machine K1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the definitive identification information at the time of stopping being a specific identification information as a necessary condition." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

A gaming machine K2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which launches a ball into a predetermined gaming area in response to the operation of the control handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card) according to the number of winning balls is given.
Gaming machine K3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B8, C1 to C6, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
There is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that includes an entrance opening formed to allow gaming balls to enter, a pair of wing members arranged on either side of the entrance opening, a drive means that applies a drive force to the pair of wing members to open or close them, and a restriction means that, when the pair of wing members are opened by the drive force of the drive means, is positioned at an allowable position that allows the entrance of the gaming ball into the entrance opening, and, when the pair of wing members are closed by the drive force of the drive means, is positioned at a restricting position that restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the entrance opening (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2011-172833 A).
However, the above-mentioned gaming machine has a problem in that it is insufficient in preventing the gaming balls from being illegally inserted into the ball entry opening.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easier to regulate the illegal entry of gaming balls into the ball entry port.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises an entry opening formed to allow a gaming ball to enter, a pair of wing members arranged on either side of the entry opening, a driving means for applying a driving force to the pair of wing members to open or close them, and a regulating means which, when the pair of wing members are opened by the driving force of the driving means, is positioned at an allowable position that allows the entry of the gaming ball into the entry opening, and when the pair of wing members are closed by the driving force of the driving means, is positioned at a regulating position that regulates the entry of the gaming ball into the entry opening, and is formed so that the regulating means can be maintained in the regulating position when the pair of wing members are closed or when the pair of wing members are open from the outside.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, and is provided with a transmission mechanism that transmits the driving force of the driving means to the pair of wing members, the transmission mechanism including a slide transmission member that is slidably displaced between an open slide position and a closed slide position by the driving force of the driving means, and a rotation transmission member that is rotated to an open rotation position by the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position to open the pair of wing members, and that is rotated to a closed rotation position by the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the closed slide position to close the pair of wing members, the regulating means being disposed on the slide transmission member, the regulating means being disposed in an allowable position when the slide transmission member is slidably displaced to the open slide position, and the regulating means being disposed in a regulating position when the slide transmission member is slidably displaced to the closed slide position, and when the slide transmission member is disposed in the closed slide position, the regulating member and the slide transmission member are engaged with each other, thereby regulating the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in which a sliding groove is extended on one of the slide transmission member and the rotation transmission member and a sliding protrusion is protruded from the other, and the sliding protrusion slides along the sliding groove to transmit the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member and rotate the rotation transmission member, and the sliding protrusion engages with the inner wall surface of the sliding groove to regulate the sliding displacement of the slide transmission member to the open slide position.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is easy to restrict the illegal entry of gaming balls into the ball entry opening.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it is possible to more easily restrict the illegal entry of gaming balls into the ball entry opening.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, it is possible to make it smaller and more difficult for regulations to be lifted.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko Machine (Amusement Machine)
13 Game Board
140 2nd prize opening (ball entrance)
15065 Variable prize winning device (guide member)
15065a Side (Guide surface)
15065b Swelling part (protruding part)
15065c bulging part (protruding part)
65a Specific prize winning slot
510 Base member
511b2 engaging part (regulating part)
511b1 standing part (intervening wall)
520 First electric device (guide member)
520L wing member
520R wing member
524L bulging part (protruding part)
524R bulge (projection)
526L side (guide surface)
526R side (guide surface)
531 Solenoid (driving means)
532 second protrusion (regulating means)
532, 8532 Sliding member (slide transmission member)
532d engagement groove (slide groove)
8532e Third protrusion (protrusion)
533, 7533 , 8533, 9533 Rotating member (rotation transmission member)
533a connecting part (engaging part)
533b protrusion (sliding protrusion)
8533e second protrusion (regulating means)
621 Light-transmitting members (transmitting members, decorative members)
624 Base material (base)
624a LED (light emitting means)
625 Reflective Material
625a1 reflective surface (continuous surface)
625b recess (partition surface)
660 Base Member
672U displacement member (first displacement member)
672D displacement member (second displacement member)
680U driving means (first support mechanism)
680D driving means (second support mechanism)
684U First link member (first one-side transmission member)
684D First link member (second one-side transmission member)
686U Second link member (first other-side transmission member)
686U Second link member (second other-side transmission member)
800 Decorative pattern display device (rotating)
810 Reel unit (2nd reel)
811 Inner reel (second outer wall)
812 Hub (2nd Sidewall)
812a1 protrusion (erected part)
812c spoke (second support wall)
812c1 inner opening (opening)
5813a protrusion (erected part)
820 outer reel unit (1st reel)
821 outer reel (first outer wall)
822 spokes (first support wall)
824 edge (first side wall)
3824a protrusion (erected part)
825 outer opening (opening)
SP1 torsion spring (biasing member, first torsion spring)
SP2 torsion spring (biasing member, second torsion spring)

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines )
1 40 2nd prize opening (ball entry area )
15065 Variable prize device (guide means )
15065a Side (guide surface)
15065b Swelling part ( front side standing means )
15065c Swelling part ( rear side standing means )
65a Specific winning opening (ball entry area)
5 11b2 Engagement part ( configuration means)
5 20 First electric device (guiding means )
520L: Feather member (part of guide means)
520R Feather member (part of guide means)
524L bulging part ( front side standing means )
524R bulging part ( rear side standing means )
526L Side (guide surface)
526R Side (guide surface )

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising an entry area configured to allow a gaming ball to enter, and a guide means having a guide surface for guiding a gaming ball toward the entry area and configured to be able to change its position in a front view, and configured to allow a gaming ball guided by the guide surface to enter the entry area and flow down to the predetermined area when the guide means is located at a predetermined position,
The guide means includes at least a front side erecting means configured to stand against the guide surface from a position connected to the front side end of the guide surface, and a rear side erecting means configured to stand against the guide surface from a position connected to the rear side end of the guide surface, and is configured so that the game ball guided by the guide surface flows down between the front side end and the rear side end of the guide surface,
The guide surface is configured such that the width in the front-rear direction is reduced at least in a portion thereof by the front side erecting means or the rear side erecting means, and a game ball guided by the guide surface can abut against either the front side erecting means or the rear side erecting means;
The front side erecting means and the rear side erecting means are configured to be capable of aligning a plurality of game balls guided by the guide surface in a flow-down area on the front side of the ball entry area so that the plurality of game balls enter the ball entry area one by one;
The gaming machine includes:
A configuration means is provided that is configured so that at least a part of the guide means, which is configured as the front side erection means or the back side erection means, can abut against the guide means when the guide means is located at the predetermined position ,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when at least the guiding means is displaced from the predetermined position, it is possible to restrict the flow of gaming balls from the ball entry area to the predetermined area .

Images